礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
在《中部》中· 《后五十经》的复注巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Majjhimanikāye · Uparipaṇṇāsa-ṭīkā
1. 天臂品复注巴利 1. Devadahavaggo
188 段
《天臂经》的注释巴利
1. Devadahasuttavaṇṇanā
1 国王们被称为“天人”:因为他们享受五欲的快乐,嬉戏、游乐,或者安住在那些欲乐中;由于具备战胜敌人的能力,他们想要征服对手;他们行使主权地位等,给予恭敬和摄受,并教导各种事务,因此行事;或者由于他们以福报之力所获得的光辉而闪耀,所以被称为“天人”。事实上,他们以四种摄事令众人欢喜,自己也以如上所说的殊胜功德而欢喜、闪耀、发光,因此被称为“王”。“在那里”指在那个城镇地区。“那”指池塘。“那”指那名为“天臂”的池塘,依它而说,因为距离它不远,这是某些人的说法。一切以乐等为分别的所受。“在过去”指在前世。“由所作业为缘”指由于所作之业的缘,依所造之业而生。以此显示:一切受都是业果,皆应被体验。因此说“以此”等。未限定而说,是指像“诸比丘,有某些沙门、婆罗门是这样说的”这样,没有特别指定“这些是某某”而说的意思;限定而说,是指像“诸比丘,尼干陀们是这样说的”这样,作出区别而显示。巴利
1. Dibbanti kāmaguṇehi kīḷanti, laḷanti, tesu vā viharanti, vijayasamatthatāyogena paccatthike vijetuṃ icchanti; issariyaṭṭhānādisakkāradānaggahaṇaṃ taṃtaṃatthānusāsanañca karontā voharanti, puññānubhāvappattāya jutiyā jotenti vāti devā vuccanti rājāno. Tathā hi te catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi janaṃ rañjayantā sayaṃ yathāvuttehi visesehi rājanti dibbanti sobhantīti ca, ‘‘rājāno’’ti vuccanti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ nigamadese. Sāti pokkharaṇī. Tanti taṃ, ‘‘devadaha’’nti laddhanāmaṃ pokkharaṇiṃ upādāya, tassa adūrabhavattāti keci. Sabbaṃ sukhādibhedaṃ vedayitaṃ. Pubbeti purimajātiyaṃ. Katakammapaccayāti katassa kammassa paccayabhāvato jātaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca. Tena sabbāpi vedanā kammaphalabhūtā eva anubhavitabbāti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘iminā’’tiādi. Aniyametvā vuttanti, ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṃvādino’’ti evaṃ ime nāmāti avisesetvā vuttamatthaṃ. Niyametvāti, ‘‘evaṃvādino, bhikkhave, nigaṇṭhā’’ti evaṃ visesetvā dasseti.
“落败之教说”就是败北的意思。因为“kali”被称为无益、灾祸,“kali”又有散播、扩散之义,所以叫“落败之教说”,也就是败北。或者,“kali”指嗔、慢等烦恼的种类,由于这些而说不恰当的话,就是“落败之教说”。想要把这一点安立起来、阐明清楚的人指出:那些不知道业是已作还是未作的人,怎么能知道“它是这样的”呢?那些不了解业的分类的人,怎么能知道它的果报?怎么能知道果报最终穷尽的状态?那些连恶业的对治法都不了解的人,怎么能知道断除它以及修成善业的方法呢?为了说明这个道理,所以说“在进一步提问时也是同样的道理”。巴利
Kalisāsananti parājayaṃ. Kalīti hi anattho vuccati, kalīti sasati vippharatīti kalisāsanaṃ, parājayo. Kalīti vā kodhamānādikilesajāti, tāya pana ayuttavāditā kalisāsanaṃ. Taṃ āropetukāmo vibhāvetukāmo . Ye kammaṃ kataṃ akataṃ vāti na jānanti, te kathaṃ taṃ edisanti jānissanti. Ye ca kammaṃ pabhedato na jānanti, te kathaṃ tassa vipākaṃ jānissanti; vipākapariyositabhāvaṃ jānissanti, ye ca pāpassa kammassa paṭipakkhameva na jānanti; te kathaṃ tassa pahānaṃ kusalakammassa ca sampādanavidhiṃ jānissantīti imamatthaṃ dassento, ‘‘uttari pucchāyapi eseva nayo’’ti āha.
2 即使在小苦蕴经(中部1.180)里,用“如此存在时”这句话,也已经直接说明了那些尼乾陀的无知状态,因为下面的说法本来就是那样展开的。正如注释书(中部注1.180)所说:“‘如此存在时’,意思是当你们这样无知存在的时候。”即便如此,那里把这个意思和后文联系起来说明时才是合理的,不能作别的理解。为了表明这一点,这里说:“‘若大尼乾陀的话为真实时存在’——这就是它的意思。”“这么多处”指的是如前所说的五种限定理由。巴利
2. Kiñcāpi cūḷadukkhakkhandhepi, (ma. ni. 1.180) ‘‘evaṃ sante’’ti iminā tesaṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ ajānanabhāvo eva ujukaṃ pakāsito heṭṭhā desanāya tathā pavattattā. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.180) vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ santeti tumhākaṃ evaṃ ajānanabhāve satī’’ti, tathāpi tattha uparidesanāya sambaddho evamattho vuccamāno yujjati, na aññathāti dassetuṃ idha, ‘‘mahānigaṇṭhassa vacane sacce santeti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettakassa ṭhānassāti yathāvuttassa pañcaparimāṇassa kāraṇassa.
3 在这里,反复多次的扩散渗入,指的是浓稠的涂抹,不像布料那样只是被沾上而已,所以说“以浓厚……涂者”。“已经说过的,就不必再说”,意思是应当依照那里所讲的方式来理解,这就是其意图。巴利
3. Anekavāraṃ visarañjanaṃ idha gāḷhāpalepanaṃ, na sāṭakassa viya littatāti āha – ‘‘bahalūpa…pe… littena viyā’’ti. Vuttameva, na puna vattabbaṃ, tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbanti adhippāyo.
这些尼乾陀并不具备那样的了知,所以经文说“或许会有能知的时候”,这只是基于假设而说的。照这个假设,他们或许能这样了知,他们的见解也或许会成为真实的。然而,因为他们的见解并不真实,所以经文表明他们其实并没有了知。“在四个时候”:就是切开疮口的时候、用探针寻找箭头的时候、拔出箭头的时候、在疮口上敷药炭的时候——在这四个时候。“在纯净部分”:意思是清净的部分,苦已经完全无余地消尽,因此达到无苦的状态,这就是其意义。“以一个譬喻”:就是“正如被箭射中的人在受伤时有感受显现的时候一样”这一个譬喻。“三个意义”:过去世我曾存在抑或不曾存在?我曾造作恶业抑或不曾造作?我曾造作如是恶业抑或不曾造作?此三者。“以四个譬喻”:以切开疮口等四个譬喻。“一个意义”:就是通过“如此多的苦已消尽”等所说出的一个意义。因为那确实在苦的消尽这一共同性上被称为一个意义。巴利
Imesaṃ nigaṇṭhānaṃ tādisassa tesaṃ abhāvato, ‘‘jānanakālo siyā’’ti parikappavasena vadati. Tena evaṃ jānituṃ tehi sakkā siyā, tesañca dassanaṃ saccaṃ siyā. Yasmā tesaṃ dassanaṃ asaccaṃ, tasmā te na jāniṃsūti dasseti. Catūsu kālesūti vaṇamukhassa parikantanakālo, sallassa esanakālo, abbuhanakālo, vaṇamukhe agadaṅgāraodahanakāloti imesu catūsu kālesu. Suddhanteti suddhakoṭṭhāse, dukkhassa anavasesato nijjīraṇaṭṭhena niddukkhabhāveti attho. Ekāya upamāyāti, ‘‘sallena viddhassa hi viddhakāle vedanāya pākaṭakālo viyā’’ti imāya ekāya upamāya. Tayo atthāti pubbe ahuvamhā vā no vā, pāpakammaṃ akarimhā vā no vā, evarūpaṃ vā pāpakammaṃ akarimhāti ime tayo atthā. Catūhi upamāhīti vaṇamukhaparikantanādīhi catūhi upamāhi. Eko atthoti, ‘‘ettakaṃ dukkhaṃ nijjiṇṇa’’ntiādinā vutto eko attho. So hi dukkhanijjīraṇabhāvasāmaññā eko atthoti vutto.
4 这些尼干陀呢,生起“我被疑虑刺伤了”这样的想法之后,所谓“收回”,意思是转回来,也就是避开。巴利
4.Imepana nigaṇṭhā. Āsaṅkāya viddhosmīti saññaṃ uppādetvā. Paccāharitunti paccāvattituṃ, pariharitunti attho.
5 相信过去论的人,就是那些信奉大尼干陀所宣扬的、以过去为对象的说法的人,那说法是:贤者们,尼干陀们确实在过去造过恶业。以真实状态,是在问:是否以如实、不颠倒的意义作为所缘而生起?剩下的句子也按同样的方式理解。与法俱,就是与法在一起,也就是具有法的,就像引导者一词的构成方式一样。这里的法是原因的意思,所以解释说有因、有原因。回击,意思是反转回去、回敬,所以叫回击;论点本身就是回击,因此叫论说回击,意思是更胜一筹的回应。因此说那是回遮之论,意思是将诘问反转回去,使对方回到原本无过失的状态。至于他们,这应当按重复提及的方式来理解,即向他们显示所谓断除他们信仰的论说。巴利
5.Atītavādaṃ saddahantānanti, ‘‘atthi kho, bho, nigaṇṭhā pubbe pāpakammaṃ kata’’nti evaṃ atītaṃsaṃ ārabbha pavattaṃ mahānigaṇṭhassa vādaṃ saddahantānaṃ. Bhūtattāti yathābhūtattā kiṃ aviparītameva atthaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattāti pucchati. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Saha dhammenāti sahadhammo, so eva sahadhammiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8). ‘‘Dhammo’’ti ettha kāraṇaṃ adhippetanti āha – ‘‘sahetukaṃ sakāraṇa’’nti. Paṭiharati paṭivattetīti paṭihāro, vādo eva paṭihāro vādapaṭihāro; taṃ, uttaranti attho. Tenāha – ‘‘paccāgamanakavāda’’nti, codanaṃ parivattetvā paṭipākatikakaraṇanti attho. Tesanti idaṃ āvuttivasena gahetabbaṃ, ‘‘tesaṃ saddhāchedakavādaṃ nāma tesaṃ dassetī’’ti.
6 无明、无知、迷惑,这些是同一个意思的不同说法。或者说,无明是指作为造作根源的无明;无知是指不了知;迷惑是指昏乱、极度愚痴。你们把现在因为自己现世的精勤造作而正在感受的苦受,颠倒地信以为“无论感受到什么……都是过去所作之因造成的”。你们执取的就是这种被称为宿作因论的颠倒执取。巴利
6.Avijjā aññāṇā sammohāti pariyāyavacanametaṃ. Avijjāti vā avijjāya karaṇabhūtāya. Aññāṇenāti ajānanena. Sammohenāti sammuyhanena mahāmuḷhatāya. Sāmaṃyeva opakkamikā etarahi attano upakkamahetu dukkhavedanaṃ vediyamānaṃ – ‘‘yaṃkiñcāyaṃ…pe… pubbekatahetū’’ti viparītato saddahatha. Pubbekatahetuvādasaññitaṃ vipallāsaggāhaṃ gaṇhatha.
7 “现法”是指当下就能亲眼见到、现前存在的。在这里应当理解的果报,就是“现法受”。所以他说“就在这一期生命当中就能带来异熟”。所谓“努力”,是指身体方面的努力,或者语言方面的努力。所谓“精勤”,是指属于心的精勤和策励。为了说明“即使在邻近的下一世都无法成熟果报,更何况在遥远的后世”,所以说了“在第二世或第三世”。因为能产生乐受、对乐受有利益,所以叫“乐受之”。然而,由于它本身是异熟受,一向只以可爱的对象为所缘,因此他说“能带来可爱所缘异熟的”。与此相反的,就是能带来不可爱所缘异熟的业。“已成就的”,是指与其他业一起令果报生起的。“于当来受的”,是指于下一世受报以及于之后继续受报的业。即便如此,虽然可以说是“已经完全成熟应受的”,但这里仍然说它就是“现法受”,不过是为了表明:从现法受这一特殊差别来看,完全成熟应受的业在这里有其殊胜之处,所以说“在这里,这个……”。在某一天做了之后,从那天起七天之内。巴利
7.Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkhabhūto, tattha veditabbaṃ phalaṃ diṭṭhadhammavedanīyaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva attabhāve vipākadāyaka’’nti. Payogenāti kāyikena payogena vā vācasikena vā payogena. Padhānenāti padahanena cetasikena ussāhanena. Āsanne bhavantare vipācetuṃ na sakkā, pageva dūreti dassetuṃ, ‘‘dutiye vā tatiye vā attabhāve’’ti vuttaṃ. Nibbattakabhāvato sukhavedanāya hitanti sukhavedanīyaṃ. Sā pana vipākavedanābhāvato ekantato iṭṭhārammaṇā eva hotīti āha ‘‘iṭṭhārammaṇavipākadāyaka’’nti. Viparītanti aniṭṭhārammaṇavipākadāyakaṃ. Nipphanneti saddhiṃ aññena kammena nibbatte. Samparāyavedanīyassāti upapajjavedanīyassa aparāpariyavedanīyassa. Evaṃ santepīti kāmaṃ paripakkavedanīyanti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyameva vuccati, tathāpi atthettha atisayo diṭṭhadhammavisesabhāvato paripakkavedanīyassāti dassetuṃ, ‘‘ayametthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmiṃ divase kataṃ, tato sattadivasabbhantare.
在那里,是指对那已成熟、应在七天内受报的业给予果报的时候。他耕了一次地,然后坐下,腹中饥饿。妻子走过来时说:“太阳已经偏高了,饭已经拿来了。”他没有生起忧恼,而是随喜自己所作的功德。他看见那发光的东西,就琢磨:“这到底是什么?也是那一类东西,只是我自己心里的分别,还是真的就是黄金?”这样探究着,他用木杖去打它。巴利
Tatrāti tasmiṃ paripakkavedanīyakammassa sattadivasabbhantare vipākadāne. Ekavāraṃ kasitvā nisīdi chātajjhatto hutvā. Āgacchantī āha – ‘‘ussūre bhattaṃ āharīyitthā’’ti domanassaṃ anuppādetvā yathā katapuññaṃ anumodati. Vijjotamānaṃ disvā, ‘‘kiṃ nu kho idampi tappakāro, mama cittavikappamattaṃ, udāhu suvaṇṇamevā’’ti vīmaṃsanto yaṭṭhiyā paharitvā.
因为那是凶暴夜叉出没的地方,他们就在王舍城附近的城中售卖千束薪。夜叉生起了贪欲,用束薪咬她。把这件事禀告国王之后,关于玛离咖夫人的故事,应当依照《法句经注》中玛离咖王妃故事所传述的方式来解说。巴利
Vāḷayakkhasañcaraṇattā rājagahūpacārassa nagare sahassabhaṇḍikaṃ cāresuṃ. Uppannarāgo cūḷāya ḍaṃsi. Rañño ācikkhitvāti taṃ pavattiṃ rañño ācikkhitvā. Mallikāya vatthu dhammapadavatthumhi (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.mallikādevīvatthu) āgatena nayena kathetabbaṃ.
即使是在临近死亡时造的业,更不用说在那之前、在更早的过去生中所造的了。说“在此生起异熟”,是因为它必定会生起果报。说“当来受业”,是因为它在另一生中给予异熟。这里只说“此生起功德”,并没有说“此生起异熟”,因为(对阿拉汉而言)已是解脱的状态。应知为“已成熟应受”,因为它没有超出前面所说的“已成熟应受”的特征。通过“最快给予果报”这句话,说明由于具有令果报生起的能力,此业就是“已成熟应受”。巴利
Maraṇasantikepi kataṃ, pageva tato puretaraṃ atītattabhāvesu ca kataṃ. Idha nibbattitavipākoti vutto avassaṃbhāvibhāvato. Samparāyavedanīyameva bhavantare vipākadāyakabhāvato. Idha nibbattitaguṇotveva vutto, na idha nibbattitavipākoti vimuttibhāvato. Paripakkavedanīyanti veditabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaparipakkavedanīyalakkhaṇānativattanato. Sabbalahuṃ phaladāyikāti etena phaluppādanasamatthatāyogena kammassa paripakkavedanīyatāti dasseti.
由于能招感四蕴或五蕴的果报,导向有想有的业被称为多受。由于只招感一种蕴的果报,导向无想有的业则是少受。不过有些人说:无色界的业因为要经过很长时间才感受果报,所以是多受;其余的则是少受。或者说,色界和无色界的业是多受,微小的业是少受。所谓有异熟的业,是指在各种缘和合时,有能力让异熟生起,而不是指已经生起了异熟的业。所谓无异熟的业,是指因为缺乏缘而无法成熟果报的业,包括无效业等类别。巴利
Catuppañcakkhandhaphalatāya saññābhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ bahuvedanīyanti vuttaṃ. Ekakhandhaphalattā asaññābhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ appavedanīyaṃ. Keci pana, ‘‘arūpāvacarakammaṃ bahukālaṃ veditabbaphalattā bahuvedanīyaṃ, itaraṃ appavedanīyaṃ. Rūpārūpāvacarakammaṃ vā bahuvedanīyaṃ, parittakammaṃ appavedanīya’’nti vadanti. Savipākaṃ kammanti paccayantarasamavāye vipākuppādanasamatthaṃ, na āraddhavipākameva. Avipākaṃ kammanti paccayavekallena vipaccituṃ asamatthaṃ ahosikammādibhedaṃ.
8 关于“现法受等”:因为现法受等十种业不可能通过精进等手段而变成另一种样子,所以这些业就按照它们本来的性质存在着。其中,尼干陀派的精进是没有用的,所以说“没有果”。这是在说明尼干陀派那种错误的精进毫无成果,也就是“破坏精进之论”。“以其他人所说的理由”:是指其他论者用来指出尼干陀派主张中过失的那些理由。因为不借助具备正确特征的因,就不可能指出外道主张中的过失。所以他说“成为有理由的”。“尼干陀派的主张和随说”:尼干陀派自己说出的、表达各自宗派教义的主张,以及弟子们复述那些主张的随说。“去到应被智者谴责的根据”:意思是他们在各个问题上都接近、达到了那些会被有智慧的人谴责的根据。“其义”等的简要意思是:按照上面所说的方式,以其他人提出的理由成为有根据的,通过显示过失,使尼干陀派的主张站不住脚;正因如此,通过显示那种主张不可信,使它干涸,以理由具足的用语使它枯萎,于是“造作恶行的”等十种应受谴责的说法就落到他们头上。巴利
8.Diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīnanti diṭṭhadhammavedanīyādīnaṃ dasannaṃ kammānaṃ upakkamena kammānaṃ aññāthābhāvassa anāpādanīyattā yathāsabhāveneva kammāni tiṭṭhanti. Tattha nigaṇṭhānaṃ upakkamo nippayojanoti āha ‘‘aphalo’’ti. Nigaṇṭhānaṃ padahanassa micchāvāyāmassa nipphalabhāvappavedano padhānacchedakavādo. Parehi vuttakāraṇehīti yehi kāraṇehi nigaṇṭhānaṃ vādesu dosaṃ dassenti. Tehi parehi vuttakāraṇehi. Na hi lakkhaṇayuttena hetunā vinā paravādesu dosaṃ dassetuṃ sakkā. Tenāha ‘‘sakāraṇā hutvā’’ti. Nigaṇṭhānaṃ vādā ca anuvādā cāti nigaṇṭhehi vuccamānā sakasakasamayappavedikā vādāceva sāvakehi vuccamānā tesaṃ anuvādā ca. Viññūhi garahitabbaṃ kāraṇaṃ āgacchantīti, ‘‘ayamettha doso’’ti tattha tattha viññūhi paṇḍitehi garahārahaṃ kāraṇaṃ upagacchanti, pāpuṇantīti attho. Tassatthotiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho , ‘‘vuttanayena parehi vuttena kāraṇena sakāraṇā hutvā dosadassanavasena nigaṇṭhānaṃ vādā anuppattā, tato eva taṃ vādaṃ appasādanīyabhāvadassanena sosentā hetusampattivohārasukkhanena milāpentā dukkaṭakammakārinotiādayo dasa gārayhāpadesā upagacchantī’’ti.
9 以集合性为因:指在各处随各自意愿而生起的集合性之相。而这集合性以决定性为特征,所以说以决定性状态为因。就像不可割断、不可毁坏的宝石一样,事物被先行决定,决定性才得以运作。以六种生类为因:指在黑色生类、蓝色生类、红色生类、黄色生类、白色生类、最胜白色生类这些生类中,以出生为因。趋向恶者:即趣向低劣的集合。巴利
9.Saṅgatibhāvahetūti tattha tattha yadicchāya samuṭṭhitasaṅgatinimittaṃ. Sā pana saṅgati niyatilakkhaṇāti āha ‘‘niyatibhāvakāraṇā’’ti. Acchejjasuttāvutaabhejjamaṇi viya hi paṭiniyatatā niyatipavattīti. Chaḷabhijātihetūti kaṇhābhijāti nīlābhijāti lohitābhijāti haliddābhijāti sukkābhijāti paramasukkābhijātīti imāsu abhijātīsu jātinimittaṃ. Pāpasaṅgatikāti nihīnasaṅgatikā.
10 这里“非已被压迫”中的“addha”一词,和“adhi”一词意思相同,所以说“非已被压迫,就是不被压制”。就像恶趣中的身体被巨大的痛苦所压制,人的身体并不是这样,所以说“不被痛苦所压制的,才叫作人的身体”。这是就通过“裸形外道”等《长部》所说的种种难行苦行来折磨自己而言。如果真是这样,那头陀支者又怎么说呢?所以他说“然而有些人……”等。因为在能导向解脱的教法中,当精进以出离轮回为依托而运行时,即使身体疲惫,由于它是依正道而发起的,所以仍然叫作正精进。巴利
10.Anaddhabhūtanti ettha adhi-saddena samānattho addha-saddoti āha – ‘‘anaddhabhūtanti anadhibhūta’’nti. Yathā āpāyiko attabhāvo mahatā dukkhena abhibhuyyati, na tathā ayanti āha – ‘‘dukkhena anadhibhūto nāma manussattabhāvo vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Acelako hotī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.394) vuttāya nānappakārāya dukkarakārikāya kilamathena. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ dhutaṅgadharāti āha ‘‘ye panā’’tiādi. Niyyānikasāsanasmiñhi vīriyanti vivaṭṭasannissitaṃ katvā pavattiyamānaṃ vīriyaṃ sarīraṃ khedantampi sammāvāyāmo nāma hoti ñāyāraddhabhāvato.
这里说的“长老”,是指玛哈拉奇达长老。三种成就,是指人间的成就、天界的成就和涅槃的成就;或者也可以指戒的成就、定的成就和慧的成就。“就在刀刃上”,意思是在刀锋上、在头顶上,也就是从刀锋和头顶移开的时候。“此人”,是指前面“出生在贵族之家”等说法所说的那种情形。并不是所有人都是先受人恭敬、出家之后才证得阿拉汉果的,所以说“有一个从婢女腹中出生的”等等。“银指环”,是指银制的戒指。“即使只有豆粟香那么一(即使仅有如木苹果树皮或花粉那般微细的花香之量)巴利
Theroti ettha āgatamahārakkhitatthero. Tisso sampattiyo manussadevanibbānasampattiyo, sīlasamādhipaññāsampattiyo vā. Khuraggeyevāti khure sīsagge eva, khure sīsaggato apanīte evāti adhippāyo. Ayanti, ‘‘issarakule nibbatto’’tiādinā vutto. Na sabbe eva sakkārapubbakaṃ pabbajitvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇantīti āha ‘‘yo dāsikucchiya’’ntiādi. Rajatamuddikanti rajatamayaṃ aṅgulimuddikaṃ. Gorakapiyaṅgumattenapīti kapitthachallikaṅgupupphagandhamattenapi.
依着法、依着正当的道理而得到的快乐,就是法乐,所以经文说“从僧团……乃至……从资具所得的快乐”。“不沉醉”就是不贪恋、不耽着。现在为了显示这种不耽着以及它的果报,才说了“法的……”等话。“此”指的是“集”。因为集是五蕴之苦的根源,它最切近、最直接,所以把它作为当下可见的来说,因此说了“诸现在”等话。“诸行”是指依着已经发起的、格外强烈的造作而被称为“行”的强盛精进和策励。“策励”是指正在运用、正在持续推动。“由道而离贪”是指以圣道对苦的根源生起离染。因此说“此已被说”。通过这一点,说明了乐行道和速通达,因为毫不费力地、更迅速地了知道而觉悟。“中立之相”说的是精进和舍。“于此处他策励诸行”是指为了离染苦的根源这一目标,他策励那名为策励之行的精进。怎样策励呢?以道的策励,在四种作用的精进中,以圣道的精进来策励、来努力。“他持平地观察”是指不过分紧绷精进,也不过分松缓,以精进平衡的方式运作,不加干预地旁观。因此说“修习舍”。而这里所谓的修舍,其实就是如此运作的圣道修习,所以说“以道的修习而修习”。巴利
Dhammena ñāyena āgatasukhaṃ dhammasukhanti āha – ‘‘saṅghato vā…pe… paccayasukha’’nti. Amucchitoti anajjhāpanno. Idāni taṃ anajjhāpannataṃ tassa ca phalaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhammikaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Imassāti samudayassa. So hi pañcakkhandhassa dukkhassa kāraṇabhūtattā āsanno paccakkho katvā vutto. Tenāha ‘‘paccuppannāna’’ntiādi. Saṅkhāranti yathāraddhāya sātisayaṃ karaṇato saṅkhāranti laddhanāmaṃ balavavīriyaṃ ussoḷhiṃ. Padahatoti payuñjantassa pavattentassa. Maggena virāgo hotīti ariyamaggena dukkhanidānassa virajjanā hoti. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Iminā sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā kathitā akasireneva sīghataraṃ maggapajānatāya bodhitattā. Majjhattatākāroti vīriyūpekkhamāha. Saṅkhāraṃ tattha padahatīti padhānasaṅkhāraṃ tattha dukkhanidānassa virajjananimittaṃ virajjanatthaṃ padahati. Kathaṃ? Maggappadhānena catukiccappadhāne ariyamagge vāyāmena padahati vāyamati. Ajjhupekkhatoti vīriyassa anaccāraddhanātisithilatāya vīriyasamatāyojane byāpārākaraṇena ajjhupekkhato. Tenāha ‘‘upekkhaṃ bhāventassā’’ti. Upekkhābhāvanā ca nāmettha tathāpavattā ariyamaggabhāvanā evāti āha – ‘‘maggabhāvanāya bhāvetī’’ti.
在这里,对于经文词句的搭配应当这样理解:“他这样了知。怎样了知呢?当我策励诸行时,通过策励诸行,对这苦的原因就离贪了;当我保持旁观时,通过这种旁观,对这苦的原因就离贪了。”对于正在修行的人,这应当理解为前行阶段的考察。其中,“策励诸行”是通过观思维察的方式,说明以安乐的方式更快地激发修行的精进,因此显示了乐行道和速通达。“保持旁观”则说明,有些人即使不以极其猛力的精进来运作,只是专注于观照修习,也能让苦的原因离贪。应当看到,这两处都阐明了第四种行道。接下来,通过“对于有这样情形的人……他在那里修习舍”等几段,是依照这些行道本身来显示那些人的修行方式。通过这些段落,说明了轮回苦因的灭尽,也就是苦的息灭。巴利
Ettha ca evaṃ pāḷiyā padayojanā veditabbā, – ‘‘so evaṃ pajānāti. Kathaṃ? Saṅkhāraṃ me padahato saṅkhārapadahanā imassa dukkhanidānassa virāgo hoti , ajjhupekkhato me upekkhanā imassa dukkhanidānassa virāgo hotī’’ti. Paṭipajjamānassa cāyaṃ pubbabhāgavīmaṃsassāti gahetabbaṃ. Tattha saṅkhārappadhānāti sammasanapadena sukheneva khippataraṃ bhāvanāussukkāpanavīriyaṃ dassitanti sukhāpaṭipadā khippābhiññā dassitā. Ajjhupekkhatoti ettha kassaci nātidaḷhaṃ katvā pavattitavīriyenapi dukkhanidānassa virāgo hoti vipassanamanuyuñjatīti dassitaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi catutthīyeva paṭipadā vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idāni, ‘‘yassa hi khvāssa…pe… upekkhaṃ tattha bhāvetī’’ti vārehi tāsaṃyeva paṭipadānaṃ vasena tesaṃ puggalānaṃ paṭipatti dassitā. Vaṭṭadukkhanidānassa parijiṇṇaṃ imehi vārehi dukkhakkhayo vibhāvito.
11 心被系缚,就是心被牢牢绑住。欲乐浓厚,就是渴爱与欲求非常强烈。越过了,就是超越、跨过。按演艺行当的规矩,跳舞的才是艺人,其余跳舞的是舞者。他生起喜悦:“我竟然舍弃了这样的女人。”断,就是变成两截。破,就是碎裂。用“断或破”这两个词,说的都是毁灭。知,就是用证悟之前的智慧来了知。那两者,就是策励诸行和修习舍。巴利
11.Baddhacittoti sambaddhacitto. Bahalacchandoti bahalataṇhāchando. Aticaritvāti atikkamitvā. Naṭasatthavidhinā naccanakā naṭā, naccakā itare. Somanassaṃ uppajjati, ‘‘īdisaṃ nāma itthiṃ pariccaji’’nti. Chijjāti dvidhā hotu. Bhijjāti bhijjatu. ‘‘Chijja vā bhijjavā’’ti padadvayenapi vināsameva vadati. Ñatvāti pubbabhāgañāṇena jānitvā. Tadubhayanti saṅkhārapadahanaupekkhābhāvanaṃ.
12 “精勤者”是指努力用功的人。“针对那一点”是指针对苦行道的出离来说的。巴利
12.Pesentassāti vāyamantassa. Taṃ sandhāyāti dukkhāya paṭipadāya niyyānataṃ sandhāya.
修习瑜伽的人就像造箭的工匠,因为就像造箭者把箭杆弄直那样,他让自己的心变得正直。心就像牛尿那样弯曲,像月牙那样扭曲,像犁尖那样歪斜。精进就像火把,因为它能燃烧、炙烤。信就像酸浆油(发酵米水油),因为它能滋润。出世间道就像矫正弯木的棍子,因为当心以涅槃为所缘时,它能让心变得正直。应当以出世间道让心变得正直,这要透过修习的通达来理解。由于是远离两边的中道,所以是以摧破烦恼群的方式来了悟断除。而另一种行道则是迟通达。在讲述这两位比丘上述两种速通达时,其余的行道也因行道的共性,按照特相理趣被一并讲述了。或者说,伴行道也已经被讲述,因为通过“并非未证得的义理”等说法,已经讲了前分道。但“未来行道没有被讲述”这句话,应当理解为是就专门观察未被讲述这一点而说的。“出离开示”,是指出离方法的开示。其余内容很容易理解。巴利
Usukāro viya yogī tejanassa viya cittassa ujukaraṇato. Gomuttavaṅkaṃ, candalekhākuṭilaṃ, naṅgalakoṭijimhaṃ cittaṃ. Alātā viya vīriyaṃ ātāpana-paritāpanato. Kañcikatelaṃviya saddhā sinehanato. Namanadaṇḍako viya lokuttaramaggo nibbānārammaṇe cittassa nāmanato. Lokuttaramaggena cittassa ujukaraṇaṃ bhāvanābhisamayato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Antadvayavajjitā majjhimā paṭipattīti katvā kilesagaṇavijjhanaṃ pahānābhisamayo. Itarā pana paṭipadā dandhābhiññāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ imāsu dvīsu yathāvuttāsu khippābhiññāsu kathitāsu, itarāpi kathitāva honti lakkhaṇahāranayena paṭipadāsāmaññato. Sahāgamanīyāpi vā paṭipadā kathitāva, ‘‘na heva anaddhabhūtaṃ atthāna’’ntiādinā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya kathitattā. ‘‘Āgamanīyapaṭipadā pana na kathitā’’ti idaṃ savisesaṃ ajjhupekkhassa akathitataṃ sandhāya vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nikkhamanadesananti nikkhamanupāyaṃ desanaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
《经》的注释巴利
2. Pañcattayasuttavaṇṇanā
21 这里“一”这个词是“其他”的意思,不是用来表示数目之类的。为了说明这一点,所以接着说“某些”。而经文里说的“有”,是用来说明这些邪见者的存在和相续不断;也正因为他们错误地执取,通过松缓的分别方式,显示世尊自己的教法确实起了作用、所说不虚。在究竟义的沙门、婆罗门当中,连后际论者的影子都没有,所以说“以出家身份”等等。依常见等而决定后际,所以叫“后际论者”,他们就是后际论者。因为他们对于后际,先由已有的渴爱和恶见来决定,又因反复串习的力量很强而加以变异决定,然后以那串习所生的、成为执取的渴爱与恶见来执取、投向、执著;所以说“决定后际、变异后际而取”。这里的“决定”和“取”应当依渴爱与取来理解,因为渴爱缘取。这在《大义释》的摄颂中也有简略说明。“依渴爱与见”,是指依渴爱与恶见的力量。或者,是依与见为依止的俱生喜贪渴爱,以及以常见等方式倾向的邪执取的力量。这里的“后”一词是指未来时,因为它以未来法为对象。由于离开色等诸蕴就没有决定所依的基础,所以“际”一词是指部分,因此说“未来的蕴部分”。“决定”是指对那后际,以渴爱使执著达到圆满、究竟。“住立”是指不舍弃那见解。巴利
21.Eketi ettha eka-saddo aññattho, na gaṇanādiatthoti taṃ dassento ‘‘ekacce’’ti āha. Yaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘santī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vijjamānatāya avicchinnatā; tato ca nesaṃ micchāgahaṇato sithilakaraṇavivecanehi attano desanāya kiccakāritā avitathatā ca dīpitā hoti. Paramatthasamaṇabrāhmaṇesu aparantakappikatāya lesopi natthīti āha ‘‘paribbajupagatabhāvenā’’tiādi. Sassatādivasena aparantaṃ kappentīti aparantakappino, te eva aparantakappikā. Yasmā tehi aparantaṃ purimatarasiddhehi taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi kappetvā āsevanabalavatāya ca vikappetvā aparabhāgasiddhehi abhinivesabhūtehi taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhehi gaṇhanti abhinivisanti parāmasanti; tasmā vuttaṃ – ‘‘aparantaṃ kappetvā vikappetvā gaṇhantī’’ti. Taṇhupādānavasena kappanagahaṇāni veditabbāni. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ mahāniddese uddānato saṅkhepato. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti taṇhāya diṭṭhiyā ca vasena. Diṭṭiyā vā upanissayabhūtāya sahajātāya abhinandanakāya ca taṇhāya sassatādiākārena abhinivisantassa micchāgāhassa ca vasena. Anāgatadhammavisayāya adhippetattā anāgatakālavācako idha apara-saddo. Rūpādikhandhavinimuttassa kappanavatthuno abhāvā anta-saddo bhāgavācakoti āha – ‘‘anāgataṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsa’’nti. Kappetvāti ca tasmiṃ aparante taṇhāya nābhinivesānaṃ samattanaṃ pariniṭṭhāpanamāha. Ṭhitāti tassā laddhiyā avijahanaṃ.
“随行”是指以未来为所缘,紧随未来而转起。“缘”就是所缘,因为未来正是那邪见的境界。正因为它成为境界,所以它就是那邪见的来处,也是所缘缘,因此说“依止、缘”。“增语词”就是施设词,比如在奴仆等人中,称某人为“吉祥增长”之类,只是言语而已;以增上为作用而转起,所以称为“增语”,也就是施设。或者这样解释:“增”是上面的意思,“说”是言语,上面的言语就是“增语”,也就是在所依的色等法之上假立的上施设,所以意思是表达施设的词语。这只是施设,比如“我”“世间”这样的说法,不像色、受等法是究竟义。又或者,因为依增上而说,“增意”也被称为邪见,因为邪见在自性法上强加恒常、本性、实有、命者、身等不真实的意义而转起。“说”是指坚持“唯有此是真实,其余都是虚妄”而说,以“这是法,这不是法”等而争论。为了表明这种论说至今仍不断相续,所以用现在时来表达。巴利
Anugatāti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena anu anu gatā aparante pavattā. Ārabbhāti ālambitvā. Visayo hi tassā diṭṭhiyā aparanto. Visayabhāvato eva hi so tassā āgamanaṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇapaccayo cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamma paṭiccā’’ti. Adhivacanapadānīti paññattipadāni, dāsādīsu sirivaḍḍhakādisaddo viya vacanamattameva adhikāraṃ katvā pavattiyā adhivacanaṃ paññatti. Atha vā adhi-saddo uparibhāve, vuccatīti vacanaṃ, upari vacanaṃ adhivacanaṃ, upādānabhūtarūpādīnaṃ upari paññāpiyamānā upādāpaññattīti attho, tasmā paññattidīpakapadānīti attho. Paññattimattañhetaṃ vuccati, yadidaṃ, ‘‘attā loko’’ti ca, na rūpavedanādayo viya paramattho. Adhikavuttitāya vā adhimuttiyoti diṭṭhiyo vuccanti. Adhikañhi sabhāvadhammesu sassatādiṃ pakatiādiṃ drabyādiṃ jīvādiṃ kāyādiñca abhūtamatthaṃ ajjhāropetvā diṭṭhiyo pavattantīti. Abhivadantīti, ‘‘idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti abhinivisitvā vadanti, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā vivadanti. Abhivadanakiriyāya ajjāpi avicchedabhāvadassanatthaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ.
“有想者”是指有想,所以说“具有想”。“无病者”是指他没有名为“破坏”的疾病。应当知道,“无病”这个词是“常”的同义词。或者,他以希求无病状态为出发点,通过承认无变异而承认它是常,因此说“无病即常”。由于“有想之我无病,死后……”这句话,就依四种四类——有色四类、无色四类、有边四类、一向乐四类——而说了十六种有想论。其中,仅依前两类四类,就应当知道有八种有想论和八种非想非非想论。“七种断灭论”是指:在人界有身、欲界天有身、色界天有身、四种无色界有身中死后,以描述有情断灭的方式,说了七种断灭论。因为不存在的东西不可能毁灭,断灭论是依于“存在”而建立的,所以说“于存在者,即对现存者而言”。由于执取“只要这个自我还没断灭,它就存在”,这里就把无生、灭尽称为“断灭”,因此说“断坏”。特别的灭尽称为“毁灭”,也就是“消失”,即“无有”,但这已超越了肉眼和慧眼的见道所及,所以说“不见”。因为在世间,“灭”这个词已在“不见”中确立。“有之灭尽”就是自性的离去,因为凡是依无生灭尽而断灭者,他并不以自性而住。巴利
Saññā etassa atthīti saññīti āha ‘‘saññāsamaṅgī’’ti. Natthi etassa rogo bhaṅgoti arogoti arogasaddassa niccapariyāyatā veditabbā. Rogarahitatāsīsena vā nibbikāratāya niccataṃ paṭijānāti diṭṭhigatikoti āha ‘‘arogoti nicco’’ti. Imināti, ‘‘saññī attā arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti iminā vacanena. Soḷasa saññīvādāti – rūpīcatukkaṃ, arūpīcatukkaṃ, antavācatukkaṃ, ekantasukhīcatukkanti – imesaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasa saññīvādā kathitā. Imesuyeva purimānaṃ dvinnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena aṭṭha saññīvādā aṭṭha ca nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā veditabbā. Satta ucchedavādāti manussattabhāve kāmāvacaradevattabhāve rūpāvacaradevattabhāve catubbidhāruppattabhāve cavitvā sattassa ucchedapaññāpanavasena satta ucchedavādā kathitā. Asato vināsāsambhavato atthibhāvanibandhano ucchedavādoti vuttaṃ ‘‘satoti vijjamānassā’’ti. Yāvāyaṃ attā na ucchijjati, tāva vijjati evāti gahaṇato nirudayavināso idha ucchedoti adhippetoti āha ‘‘upaccheda’’nti. Visesena nāso vināso, abhāvo, so pana maṃsacakkhu-paññācakkhu-dassanapathātikkamovāti āha ‘‘adassana’’nti. Adassane hi nāsa-saddo loke niruḷho. Bhavavigamanti sabhāvāpagamanaṃ yo hi nirudayavināsavasena ucchijjati, na so attano sabhāveneva tiṭṭhati.
五种见法涅槃论:是指通过享受五种欲乐之乐,以及通过享受四种色界禅那之乐,而宣称在现世就能证得涅槃的种种主张。所谓“见法”,就是指以能见的智慧所证得的法。其中,即使不是感官所能触及的对象,也因为极其明显而变得如同感官对象一样,所以说“见法就是现前之法”。也正因为如此,才说“这是对在各处所得之身的称呼”。以“有想”等三种形态而存在的——也就是“有想、无想、非想非非想”这些形态的存在——恒常存在、始终可得,这就是常见的意思。“有想之我”等三种见解。按“存在”之义归为一种,即随顺常我的见解算一种。其余两种就是被称为断灭论和见法涅槃论的两种见解。三种变成五种——这里“按存在之义为一种”是就归类而说的,而“有想”等的区分是就分别而说的,这很容易理解,所以在注疏中没有再列出来。巴利
Pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti pañcakāmaguṇasukhamanubhogavasena catubbidharūpajjhānasukhaparibhogavasena ca diṭṭhadhamme nibbānappattipaññāpanavādā. Diṭṭhadhammoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena upaladdhadhammo. Tattha yo anindriyavisayo, sopi supākaṭabhāvena indriyavisayo viya hotīti āha – ‘‘diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccatī’’ti. Teneva ca, ‘‘tattha tattha paṭiladdhaattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti vuttaṃ. Saññīti ādivasena tīhākārehi santanti saññī asaññī nevasaññīnāsaññīti imehi ākārehi vijjamānaṃ, sadā upalabbhamānaṃ sassatanti attho. Saññī attātiādīni tīṇi dassanāni. Santaatthavasena ekanti sassatassa attano vasena ekaṃ dassanaṃ. Itarāni dveti ucchedavāda-diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādasaññitāni dve dassanāni. Tīṇi hutvā pañca hontīti idaṃ, ‘‘santaatthavasena eka’’nti saṅgahavasena vuttassa saññīti ādivibhāgavasena vuttattā suviññeyyanti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na uddhaṭaṃ.
22 在这里,“或者是有色的”这句话,如果理解为“因为他有色,所以称为有色者”,那么照这样说来,离了色的“我”就应当像“想”一样,色也成为我所拥有的东西。因为在“有想的我”这句话里,想本身并不是我。正如《吉祥悦意》中所说:“在那里,把现起的想执取为他的想。”既然如此,那么“执取遍相之色为我”这句话又怎么说得通呢?不过,不应该把它看成“因为他有色,所以称为有色者”,而应该看成“具有坏灭的性质,所以称为有色者”。这里,坏灭或坏灭之性即是色,此为其所有,故称“有色者”,如“具有色法者”等(《法集》双论母)中的用法。这里,坏灭是指由于遍相色与色相似,随着增长和减退的时节而发生的差别,而这种差别并不存在,所以不能说有局限、广大等的差别。如果这样,那么这种主张就被常见所收摄,难道不成立吗?不,并非不成立,因为从身体坏灭之后,由于“我”无有变易,所以那是他所意乐的。正如所说:“无病者死后。”或者,即使说“因为他有色,所以称为有色者”,也没有过失。因为即使是通过分别而安立的差别,也能看到表示所属的关系,如“石女儿的尸体”。或者,坏灭或坏灭之性即是色,此为其所有,故称“有色者”,如“具有色法者”等(《法集》双论母)中的用法。这样理解之后,由于“我”具有色的本性,所以说“色是我”这句话就是合乎道理的,因此说“执取遍相之色为我”。对于“无色”一句,也应依照上述方式,随其所应地解说其义。舍弃了寂静微细者,而对与之相反者加以执取,是没有理由的,所以是获得者;把“执取遍相之色为我”这句话,除了获得者的思惟之外,其余的思惟都已由获得者的执取本身所摄。未闻思惟者和纯粹思惟者,由于思惟不受约束,有时也会执取遍相之色为我,所以说“两者都执取色”。纯粹思惟者没有执取两者,因此这是有疑之说。巴利
22.Rūpīṃvāti ettha (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.76-77) yadi rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpīti ayamattho adhippeto. Evaṃ sati rūpavinimuttena attanā bhavitabbaṃ saññāya viya rūpassapi attaniyattā. Na hi saññī attāti ettha saññā attā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sumaṅgalavilāsiniyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.76-77) ‘‘tattha pavattasaññañcassa saññāti gahetvāti vutta’’nti. Evaṃ sante, ‘‘kasiṇarūpaṃ attāti gaṇhātī’’ti idaṃ kathanti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ – ‘‘rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī’’ti, atha kho ‘‘ruppanasīlo rūpī’’ti. Ruppanañcettha rūpasarikkhatāya kasiṇarūpassa vaḍḍhitāvaḍḍhitakālavasena visesāpatti, sā ca natthīti na sakkā vattuṃ parittavipulatādivisesasabbhāvato. Yadi evaṃ imassa vādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yujjatīti? No na yujjati kāyabhedato uddhaṃ attano nibbikāratāya tena adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī’’ti vuccamānepi na doso. Kappanāsiddhenapi hi bhedena sāminiddesadassanato yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti . Ruppanaṃ vā ruppanasabhāvo rūpaṃ, taṃ etassa atthīti rūpī, attā ‘‘rūpino dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 11 dukamātikā) viya. Evañca katvā rūpasabhāvattā attano ‘‘rūpaṃ attā’’ti vacanaṃ ñāyāgatamevāti ‘‘kasiṇarūpaṃ attāti gaṇhātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Arūpinti ettāpi vuttanayānusārena yathārahaṃ attho vattabbo. Santasukhumaṃ muñcitvā tabbiparītassa gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthīti lābhī, ‘‘kasiṇarūpaṃ attā’’ti gaṇhātīti lābhitakkino ṭhapetvā, sesatakkī lābhiggahaṇeneva gahitā. Anussutitakkikopi suddhatakkikopi vā niraṅkusattā takkanassa kasiṇarūpampi attāti kadācipi gaṇheyyāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘ubhopi rūpāni gaṇhātiyevā’’ti. Suddhatakkikassa ubhayaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ, tasmā sāsaṅkavacanaṃ.
破除遍相后的虚空、第一无色定的识、无所有处的无所有性,这些是无色定的所缘相。这里说“除了想蕴”,是把想当作自己所拥有的东西放在心里之后才这么说的。但如果按照前面解释“有色”时所说的方式来理解这里的含义,就不应该把想蕴排除在外,而应该直接说“在无色法中”。所谓“以混合执取的方式”,就是把色定和无色定的相合在一起,然后执取“这是一个我”,同时把在那种状态下生起的想执取为“这就是想”。这位持邪见的人因为证得了色定和无色定,就把那些相执取为色性和无色性而安住其中,因此就像执取内在之我的人那样,或者仅仅凭推理,把色法和无色法混合起来执取,从而生起“我既有色又是无色”的执著。所谓“仅凭推理的执取”,是指像那些达到诸行残余的微细状态的法一样,由于变得极度微细,就无法再执行各自的作用,好比柱子、墙壁、手、脚的聚合体——说它是色,它又不像色那样起作用;说它不是色,它又没有超越色的本质。随顺这种推理而产生的执取。或者也可以从证得者的角度来理解,按照在有边无边论第四种主张中将要说到的方式,从彼此对立的角度来了知它的含义。不过在那里,第三和第四种主张是依处所和时间的差别而说的;在这里,则是依时间和对象的差别而说的,这就是唯一的区别。在这里,第三种主张是依时间的差别而起的,因为色与无色的相不会同时现起;第四种主张则是依对象的差别而起的,因为色法和无色法被聚合在一起,并依“有一个我”的推理而起。应当依照那里下文所说的方法来了知。巴利
Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsa-paṭhamāruppaviññāṇa-natthibhāvaākiñcaññāyatanāni arūpasamāpattinimittaṃ. Ṭhapetvā saññākkhandhanti idaṃ saññāya attaniyataṃ hadaye katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Rūpiṃ vā’’ti ettha vuttanayena pana atthe vuccamāne saññākkhandhaṃ bahiddhā akatvā ‘‘arūpadhamme’’icceva vattabbaṃ siyā. Missakaggāhavasenāti rūpārūpasamāpattīnaṃ nimittāni ekajjhaṃ katvā, ‘‘eko attā’’ti, tattha pavattasaññañcassa, ‘‘saññā’’ti gahaṇavasena. Ayañhi diṭṭhigatiko rūpārūpasamāpattilābhitāya taṃnimittaṃ rūpabhāvena arūpabhāvena ca gahetvā upatiṭṭhati, tasmā, ‘‘rūpī arūpī cā’’ti abhinivesaṃ janeti ajjhattavādino viya takkamatteneva vā rūpārūpadhamme missakavasena gahetvā, ‘‘rūpī ca arūpīca attā hotī’’ti. Takkagāhenevāti saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvappattadhammā viya ca accantasukhumabhāvapattiyā sakiccasādhanāsamatthatāya thambhakuṭṭahatthapādānaṃ saṅghāto viya neva rūpī, rūpasabhāvānativattanato na arūpīti evaṃ pavattatakkagāhena. Lābhivasenapi vā antānantikacatutthavāde vakkhamānanayena aññamaññapaṭipakkhavasena attho veditabbo. Kevalaṃ pana tattha desakālabhedavasena tatiyacatutthavādā icchitā; idha kālavatthu bhedavasenāti ayameva viseso. Kālabhedavasena cettha tatiyavādassa pavatti rūpārūpanimittānaṃ saha anupaṭṭhānato; catutthavādassa pana vatthubhedavasena pavatti rūpārūpadhammānaṃ samūhato, ‘‘eko attā’’ti takkavasenāti tattha vakkhamānanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
即使对证得八等至的见行者来说,由于进入不同等至时想会呈现种种差别,第二种邪见确实也可以从入定者的角度成立;但因为在每一种等至中,想都是以同一种面貌现起的,所以说“第一种邪见是从入定者的角度讲述的”。正因如此,这里才特别采用了“入定者”这一说法。或者也可以理解为,这只是就证得单一种等至的人而说的。虽然因入不同等至确实可能产生想的差别,但缘取外在众多对象时所产生的想的差别更为粗显,因此说第二种邪见是“种种想者”,并说“第二种邪见是从非入定者的角度讲述的”。为了说明依未扩大的遍相而称为“小”、依已扩大的遍相而称为“无量”,才说了“第三见中,有的如手掌大、有的如钵大”等话。像“我的自我如拇指大、如麦粒大,或如微尘般微小”这类见解,就是所谓“小的有想者”,即“小想者”。而像迦毗罗、迦那陀等人那样,主张自己的自我周遍一切处,就是所谓“无量的有想者”,即“无量想者”——这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Yadipi aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino diṭṭhigatikassa vasena samāpattibhedena saññānānattasambhavato dutiyadiṭṭhipi samāpannakavasena labbhati; tathāpi samāpattiyaṃ ekarūpeneva saññāya upaṭṭhānato, ‘‘paṭhamadiṭṭhi samāpannakavārena kathitā’’ti āha. Tenevettha samāpannakaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Ekasamāpattilābhino eva vā vasena attho veditabbo. Samāpatti bhedena saññābhedasambhavepi bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇe saññānānattena oḷārikena nānattasaññīti, ‘‘dutiyadiṭṭhi asamāpannakavārenā’’ti āha. Avaḍḍhitakasiṇavasena parittasaññitaṃ, vaḍḍhitakasiṇavasena appamāṇasaññitaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘tatiyadiṭṭhi suppamattena vā sarāvamattena vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Aṅguṭṭhappamāṇo vā attā yavappamāṇo, aṇumatto vā attā’’tiādidassanavasena (udā. aṭṭha. 54; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.76-77) paritto saññīti parittasaññī. Kapilakaṇādādayo (vibha. anuṭī. 189) viya attano sabbagatabhāvapaṭijānanavasena appamāṇo saññīti appamāṇasaññīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
这里说的“此”,是指前面“有色”等说法所讲的那种有我论。“某些人”,是指某些人当中的一部分。“超越”,意思是跨越、超过。这里用属格来表示区分和拣择。要把“有些人说识遍”这句话跟前后连起来理解。因此注释说:“除了想……他们这样说。”其中,“除了想之外,其余三种”这个说法,是把四种想全都完整地算进去;另一些人则说想有八种。所谓“那两者”,说的就是这被称为“八种想”的两种情况。这在后面会清楚说明,也就是“四种色想”等段落。后面确实会说:“按类别分有八种,但按实际意义说,只有七种想。”在“或者他又这样认为”这句经文里,那些能够超越的人,是因为看到了低层次的过患、看到了更高层次的功德,所以信心等善法得以增长;反过来,做不到这样,就无法超越。只有那些能超越的人,这里才被特别提出来,因为只有依据他们的情况,才能说明接下来要讲的更高层次的差别。而这些能超越的人,他们能超越,是随各自智慧和力量的大小而定的。为了用譬喻说明这个道理,才说了“而对于他们”这一段。其中“无量”,是指心缘取无量的对象;这种能缘无量对象的状态,应当知道是从修行方法而来,或者说是由于所缘没有边际。但这并不是说,他在对象上执取“这是无边际的”,或者去衡量它的大小。这种人因为不被苦与乐所动摇,也因为修习离色之欲的殊胜状态,所以达到并安住于不动,他们宣说并安立:“这就是我的我。”“有些人说识遍”,意思是有些持邪见的人把识无边处当作“我”。因此注释说:“先来说明识无边处。”另一些人则认为,识无边处所缘的对象,是在破除遍相后的虚空中生起的识。因为通过作意遍相而得到它,所以叫“识遍”;而这个识,因为它是心所缘的对象,所以叫“处”;合起来也就称为“识无边处”。“有些人说无所有处”,这里的道理也是一样的。巴利
Etanti, ‘‘rūpiṃ vā’’tiādinā yathāvuttaattavādaṃ. Ekesanti ekaccānaṃ. Upātivattatanti atikkamantānaṃ. Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Viññāṇakasiṇameke abhivadantīti yojanā. Tenāha – ‘‘saññaṃ…pe… abhivadantī’’ti. Tattha ‘‘saññaṃ ṭhapetvā sesāni tīṇī’’ti idaṃ saññāya catukkampi paripuṇṇameva gahetvā, apare aṭṭhakanti vadanti. Tadubhayanti taṃ saññāaṭṭhakanti vuttaṃ ubhayaṃ. Parato āvi bhavissatīti, ‘‘catasso rūpasaññī’’tiādinā upari pakāsessati. Vakkhati hi – ‘‘koṭṭhāsato aṭṭha, atthato pana satta saññā hontī’’ti (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.22). Etthāti, ‘‘etaṃ vā panā’’ti etasmiṃ vākye. Samatikkamituṃ sakkonti tattha ādīnavadassanena taduddhaṃ ānisaṃsadassanena ca brūhitasaddhādi guṇattā, vipariyāyena asakkuṇanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ye sakkonti, teva gahitā tesaṃyeva vasena vakkhamānassa visesassa vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyattā. Sakkontānañca nesaṃ upātivattanaṃ attano ñāṇabalānurūpanti imamatthaṃ upamāya dassetuṃ, ‘‘tesaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha appamāṇanti appamāṇārammaṇo , appamāṇārammaṇatā cassa āgamanavasena veditabbā anantārammaṇato vā. Na hi ārammaṇe anantanti paramānantassa pamāṇaṃ vā gaṇhāti. Sukhadukkhehi aniñjanato rūpavirāgabhāvanāvisesatāya ca āneñjaṃ patvā tiṭṭhati, ayaṃ no attāti abhivadantā tiṭṭhanti. Viññāṇakasiṇameketi viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ eke diṭṭhigatikā attāti vadanti. Tenāha – ‘‘viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ tāva dassetu’’nti. Tassa pana ārammaṇabhūtaṃ kasiṇugghāṭimākāse pavattaviññāṇanti apare. Tañhi kasiṇaṃ manasikāravasena, ‘‘viññāṇakasiṇa’’nti, viññāṇañca taṃ ārammaṇaṭṭhena āyatanañcāti, ‘‘viññāṇañcāyatana’’nti ca vuccati. Ākiñcaññāyatanameketi etthāpi eseva nayo.
所谓“此”,其中 ya 这个字是作词句连接用的,所以说“这个此”。所谓“恶见”,就是像前面所说的“有想的我”那样被宣说的见。见本身就是恶见,就像“已解脱”“已至行”等说法中的用法一样。或者,因为无所可至,见仅仅是被至的状态,就叫恶见,意思是仅仅是对见的执取。又或者,恶见是见的种类。因为世间人在使用“种类”“相应”“所至”“类别”这些词时,把它们当作同义词。见的因就是见的缘,意思是无明等是见的立足处。其中,无明确实是见的立足处,因为它作为亲依止等。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,未听闻的凡夫不见圣者,不熟知圣法……”等等。触也是见的立足处,如所说:“那也是以触为缘。”想也是见的立足处,如所说:“因为戏论妄想以想为源头。”寻也是见的立足处,如所说:“在诸见中推度思择后,他们说真实与虚妄这二法。”非理作意也是见的立足处,如所说:“当他这样作意时,六种见中的某一种见生起——‘有我’;他生起把‘我’当作真实、确凿的见。”见的所缘,就是成为见之所缘的五取蕴。因此说:“观色为我”等等。因为离开了色、受等,见就没有所缘,所以不取其他,只指出这一点:“以此缘而执取了这种见。”或者,这里的“以此缘”,通过“缘”这个词,所缘也应该被理解为已经包含在内了。巴利
Tayidanti ya-kāro padasandhikaroti āha ‘‘taṃ ida’’nti. Diṭṭhigatanti yathā vuttaṃ ‘‘saññī attā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ diṭṭhiṃ. Diṭṭhiyeva hi diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘muttagataṃ (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11), saṅkhāragata’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 41) viya. Gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ, diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattanti attho. Diṭṭhipakāro vā diṭṭhigataṃ. Lokiyā hi vidhayuttagatapakārasadde samānatthe icchanti. Diṭṭhipaccayo diṭṭhikāraṇaṃ, avijjādi diṭṭhiṭṭhānanti attho. Tattha avijjāpi hi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upanissayādibhāvato. Yathāha – ‘‘assutavā, bhikkhave, puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādi (dha. sa. 1007). Phassopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.118-124). Saññāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’ti (su. ni. 880; mahāni. 109). Vitakkopi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti (su. ni. 892; mahāni. 121). Ayonisomanasikāropi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘tassevaṃ manasikaroto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati, atthi me attāti tassa saccato thetato diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.19). Diṭṭhārammaṇanti diṭṭhiārammaṇabhūtaṃ upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.130). Rūpavedanādivinimuttassa diṭṭhiyā ārammaṇassa abhāvato anādiyitvā idameva dasseti – ‘‘iminā paccayena idaṃ nāma dassanaṃ gahita’’nti. Iminā paccayenāti vā ettha paccayaggahaṇena ārammaṇampi gahitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
所谓“那即是”,指的是恶见以及由见所引生的东西。在“所谓色想”这句话里,iti 这个词是表示“引出”的意思,evaṃ 这个词是表示“方式、样态”的意思,整句的意思是:以“如果有色想”这样的方式所说的那些想。由于远离盖等烦恼杂染,故为无烦恼;由于达到殊胜、精妙的状态,因此是最上的;正因为最上,所以没有比这更上的,故为无上。所谓“宣说”,即显现。因为无所有处想是单独说的,以及第四无色想的缘故,在这个有想者的论说中没有进入,所以“如果有无色想”这句话,说的正是空无边处想和识无边处想。而由另外两种来说,即“如果有单一想,如果有种种想”这两种表述。这里所说的等至者一节也是如此,这是意图。从分类来说有八种想,从两组四法的摄括来说。除去“单一想”这一句,从意义上说则有七种想,因为未取的不取,这是意图。因此说:“等至者……乃至……已摄括”。巴利
Tadevāti diṭṭhigatañceva diṭṭhipaccayañca. Rūpasaññānanti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Evaṃ-saddo pakārattho, ‘‘yadi rūpasaññāna’’ntiādinā pakārena vuttasaññānanti attho. Nirupakkilesā nīvaraṇādi upakkilesavimuttito. Uttamā paṇītabhāvappattito, tato eva seṭṭhā, seṭṭhattā eva uttaritarābhāvato anuttariyā. Akkhāyatīti upaṭṭhāti. Ākiñcaññāyatanasaññāya visuṃ vuccamānattā catutthāruppasaññāya ca imasmiṃ saññīvāde anotaraṇato, ‘‘yadi āruppasaññānanti iminā ākāsānañcāyatana-viññāṇañcāyatanasaññā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Itarehi pana dvīhīti, ‘‘yadi ekattasaññānaṃ, yadi nānattasaññāna’’nti imehi dvīhi padehi. Samāpannakavāro ca tathā idha kathitoti adhippāyo. Koṭṭhāsato aṭṭha saññā catukkadvayasaṅgahato. Ekattasaññīpadaṃ ṭhapetvā atthato pana satta saññā honti aggahitaggahaṇenāti adhippāyo. Tenāha – ‘‘samāpannaka…pe… saṅgahitoyevā’’ti.
“想所成”是指依想而趣向,或者说是摄属于想。不过,因为即使是没有恶见的人也具有这种情况,所以说“与恶见俱”。“由诸缘会合而造作”是指与作为因的诸缘一同会合,以与它们同为因的方式产生出来;意思是缘所生。因为是有所造作的,所以是粗显的,具有生、灭、变异。凡是能观察到它的生起、能观察到它的坏灭、能观察到它在住位时的变异,由于它每一刹那都在坏灭,对这样观察的人来说,它那明显的变化就是粗显的。但这里不应该举道果法,因为它们并非那样随观;它们也因是有造作的,与其余诸法同样可以相应,所以难以遮止。正如“无余离贪灭尽”之说,由于道也有出离之义,所以这里以“诸行的灭尽存在”之说,将涅槃作为对立面而举出,作“它们在此灭尽”。这里应当引“诸比丘,有未生、未有、无造作”的经文,说明所谓灭的涅槃是存在的。见涅槃者:通过作证现观而见涅槃者,由此成就其余现观之义,他超越了行作巴利
Saññāgatanti saññāvasena gataṃ, saññāsaṅgahaṃ gataṃ vā. Tassa pana adiṭṭhigatassapi upalabbhamānattā, ‘‘saddhiṃ diṭṭhigatenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paccayehi samāgantvā katanti saha kāraṇabhūtehi paccayehi teneva saha kāraṇabhāvena samāgantvā nibbattitaṃ; paṭiccasamuppannanti attho. Saṅkhatattā oḷārikaṃ uppādavayaññathattasabbhāvato. Yassa hi uppādo paññāyati, vayo paññāyati, ṭhitassa aññathattaṃ paññāyati, taṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvato passantassa pākaṭabhūtavikāraṃ oḷārikaṃ siyā. Na cettha maggaphaladhammā nidassetabbā tesaṃ tathā ananupassitabbato; tesampi saṅkhatabhāvena itarehi samānayogakkhamatāya dunnivārayabhāvato. Tathā hi ‘‘asesavirāganirodhā’’ti (udā. 3) vacanato maggassapi nissaraṇabhāvena ‘‘atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodho’’ti nibbānamevettha paṭiyogabhāvena uddhaṭaṃ ‘‘nirujjhanti etthā’’ti katvā. Nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ nāma atthīti ettha, – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, ajātaṃ abhūtaṃ asaṅkhata’’nti suttapadaṃ (udā. 73) ānetvā vattabbaṃ. Nibbānadassīti sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena nibbānadassī, tato eva itarābhisamayatthasiddhiyā taṃ saṅkhataṃ atikkanto.
23 关于“八种无想论”这一段,是依据《梵网经》(《长部》1.78-80)中已有的论述方式来说的,前面已经说过:“以‘有想’这个词,解说了八种无想论。”但这里只举出了四种论,所以说“无想”等等。这个道理在后文“八种非想非非想论”中也同样适用。当想存在时,由于它执取感受,所以说“从逼迫的意义上讲,想是病”。由于与苦相连、与刺相连,由于烦恼不净的流出,由于以生、老、坏灭而肿胀、成熟、破裂,所以想是疮;这个含义正是因为它的过失性质而成立,所以说“从有过失的意义上,称为疮”。由于能产生压迫、从内部穿刺、难以拔除,所以想是箭;这个含义是通过它进入并安住在有身之中而成立的,所以说“从已进入内部的意义上,称为箭”。在结生投胎时,识就像从某处而来,所以说“依结生而有来”。“去”指流转。而这种流转发生在种种不同的生命形态中,所以说“依死而有去”;意思是通过增长的力量、通过密集相续的力量。因此说“一个接一个”。正是这种一个接一个相续而转起的识,被喜所润泽;或者依其余三蕴,达到增长、安住、广大。也可以这样搭配:以增长为去,以舍弃为死;从此以诸色相续为生,以根成熟为老,以各各业已作已积为增盛,以彼业果的生起为广大。巴利
23.Aṭṭhasu asaññīvādesūti idaṃ brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.78-80) āgatanayena vuttameva hi sandhāya heṭṭhā, ‘‘saññīti iminā aṭṭha asaññīvādā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idha pana cattāro vādā eva uddhaṭā. Tenāha ‘‘asaññī’’tiādi. Esa nayo parato ‘‘aṭṭhasu nevasaññīnāsaññīvādesū’’ti etthāpi. Saññāya sati tāya vedanāgāhasabbhāvato ‘‘ābādhanaṭṭhena saññā rogo’’ti vuttaṃ. Dukkhatāsūlayogato kilesāsucipaggharaṇato uppādajarābhaṅgehi uddhumātapakkapabhijjanato ca saññā gaṇḍo; svāyamattho dosaduṭṭhatāya eva hotīti āha – ‘‘sadosaṭṭhena gaṇḍo’’ti. Pīḷājananato antotudanato duruddharaṇato ca saññā sallaṃ; svāyamattho attabhāvaṃ anupavisitvā avaṭṭhānenāti āha ‘‘anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena salla’’nti. Paṭisandhiggahaṇe viññāṇaṃ kutoci āgataṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭisandhivasena āgati’’nti. Gatinti pavattiṃ. Sā pana tāsu tāsu gatīsu vutti hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘cutivasena gati’’nti; vaḍḍhanavasena ghanapabandhavasenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘aparāpara’’nti. Aparāparañhi pabandhavasena pavattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ nandūpasecanaṃ; itaraṃ khandhattayaṃ vā nissāya abhivuddhiṃ patiṭṭhaṃ mahantañca pāpuṇātīti. Pavaḍḍhavasena vā gatiṃ, nikkhepavasena cutiṃ, tato aparāparañca rūpapavattanavasena upapattiṃ, indriyaparipākavasena vuḍḍhiṃ tassa tassa kammassa katūpacitabhāvena viruḷhiṃ; tassa kammassa phalanibbattiyā vepullanti yojetabbaṃ.
“当然,即使……”等话,是先说明“除了色”这类诘问是依特相而说的;同时,这种诘问方式也可能因为所涉范围不特定而成立。为了说明这里的诘问其实有特定范围,才说了“然而此问”等话。“于如是所说诸蕴”:就是指前面所说的色、受等四蕴。“除了色”:这句话表明,无论在哪里,离开色都不可能有识的生起。针对特定存在的诘问,则从自性本身指出:离开识,色也不可能生起。因此说:“在无色有中也有色,在无想有中也有识。”“已入灭尽定者”:即使已证入想受灭尽定的人,也仍然有识。如果你被文句的表面所蒙蔽而排斥实义,也就是只抓住字面意思而不领会真正意图,那这部经就成了需要引申义的了。在这里,第一种主张是就投生于无想有的众生而说的;第二种主张,是按照“把想执为自我”那里所说的方式,执取想本身就是自我,由于执为自我所属的那一状态中不存在其他想,所以转起了“无想”的说法;第三种主张,是执取想与色法,或者执取一切色法、无色法为自我而转起的;第四种主张,纯粹是依推论执取而转起的。其中应当说明的内容,依照前面所说的方式理解即可。在“非想非非想论”中也是如此:第一种主张,是就投生于无想有的众生在死与结生时,或者在任何情况下,承认有一种微细的想存在,虽然它无法执行明显的想的作用;第二种主张等,则是按照“无想论”中所说的方式,依微细想而承认其有认知的自性。这样,在这里应当理解这些主张的成立方式。其余部分与前面所说相同。巴利
Kāmañcātiādinā ‘‘aññatra rūpā’’tiādikā codanā lakkhaṇavasena vuttāti dassetvā ayañca nayo codanāya avisiṭṭhavisayatāya siyā; visiṭṭhavisayā panāyaṃ codanāti dassetuṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ pana pañho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettake khandheti yathāvutte rūpavedanādike cattāro khandhe. Aññatra rūpāti iminā yattha katthaci rūpena vinā viññāṇassa pavatti natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti. Bhavavisesacodanāya sabhāvato eva viññāṇena vinā rūpassapi pavatti natthīti dīpitaṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘arūpabhavepi rūpaṃ, asaññābhave ca viññāṇaṃ atthī’’ti. Nirodhasamāpannassāti saññāvedayitanirodhaṃ samāpannassapi viññāṇaṃ atthi. Byañjanacchāyāya ce atthaṃ paṭibāhasīti yadi saddatthameva gahetvā adhippāyaṃ na gaṇhasi neyyatthaṃ suttanti. Ettha ca asaññabhave nibbattasattavasena paṭhamavādo; saññaṃ attato samanupassatīti ettha vuttanayena saññaṃyeva attāti gahetvā tassa kiñcanabhāvena ṭhitāya aññāya saññāya abhāvato asaññīti pavatto dutiyavādo; tathā saññāya saha rūpadhamme sabbe eva vā rūpārūpadhamme attāti gahetvā pavatto tatiyavādo; takkaggāhavaseneva pavatto catutthavādo. Tesu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Nevasaññīnāsaññīvādepi asaññabhave nibbattassa sattassa cutipaṭisandhīsu; sabbattha vā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthāya sukhumāya saññāya atthibhāvapaṭijānanavasena paṭhamavādo; asaññīvāde vuttanayena sukhumāya saññāya vasena sañjānanasabhāvatāpaṭijānanavasena ca dutiyavādādayo pavattāti. Evamettha etesaṃ vādānaṃ sabbhāvo veditabbo. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
24 24. 在没有想的地方,智慧根本不可能生起,所以说“无想就是痴”,意思是:无想的状态就是痴的运作。正如“出离”一词:因为“出离”在多数用例中是作主动者(即能出离者),所以这里“所应知”一词也应同样理解。因此说“识知故为所应知”,意思是:识知就是识。因此,“唯由所见、所闻、所觉、所应知之量”的意思是:唯以所见、所闻、所觉、所识为衡量标准,应当这样理解。所以说“唯由五门想转起之量”,因为处于无分别的状态,其修习的志向与五门想转起的程度相等。 “唯由粗显诸行的转起之量”:指粗显诸行的转起。这里的“粗显诸行”,指的是以无所有处定为最终顶点的诸等至法。“获得成就”:指那些人虽然看到了想的过患和无想状态的过患,并称赞非想非非想处,却仅仅以证得色界禅那来施设它的“成就”、“获得”、“证得”;因为那不是正确的方法,所以称它为败坏。因此说“破坏”等。“出起”:是以进入相似禅定为前导的安住。他们其实根本没有那种等至,因为未曾证得。“唯由粗显诸行的转起”,甚至说“由无所有处诸行的转起”也不称为应证得;因为要超越那些之后才能证得。 “诸行”一词是简别义的属格。“剩余”的意思:从此之后再也没有更微细的状态了,所以在达到微细状态时,它们是剩余的。因此说:“以修习之力,诸行达到了完全微细的状态。” “此”指非想非非想处,在如是诸行的证得中,因为如此称呼,所以名为应证得。“有为”:因为由诸缘和合造作而成。巴利
24. Yattha na saññā, tattha ñāṇassa sambhavo eva natthīti āha – ‘‘asaññā sammoho’’ti, asaññabhāvo nāma sammohappavattīti attho. Yathā niyyantīti niyyāniyāti bahulaṃ vacanato kattusādhano niyyāniyasaddo, evaṃ idha viññātabbasaddoti āha – ‘‘vijānātītiviññātabba’’nti, vijānanaṃ viññāṇanti attho. Tena diṭṭhasutamutaviññātabbamattenāti diṭṭhasutamutaviññāṇappamāṇenāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha – ‘‘pañcadvārikasaññāpavattimattenā’’ti, nibbikappabhāvato pañcadvārikasaññāpavattisamena bhāvanābhinīhārenāti attho. Oḷārikasaṅkhārappavattimattenāti oḷārikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ pavattiyā. Oḷārikasaṅkhārāti cettha ākiñcaññāyatanapariyosānā samāpattidhammā adhippetā. Upasampadanti ye saññāya, asaññibhāve ca dosaṃ disvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ vaṇṇentāpi rūpajjhānapaṭilābhamattena tassa sampādanaṃ paṭilābhaṃ adhigamaṃ paññapenti, tesaṃ tassa byasanaṃ akkhāyati anupāyabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘vināso’’tiādi. Vuṭṭhānanti sadisasamāpajjanapubbakaṃ parivuṭṭhānaṃ. Samāpatti eva tesaṃ natthi anadhigatattā. Oḷārikasaṅkhārappavattiyā antamaso ākiñcaññāyatanasaṅkhārappavattiyāpi pattabbanti na akkhāyati tepi samatikkamitvā pattabbato. Saṅkhārānanti niddhāraṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Avasesāti ito paraṃ sukhumabhāvo nāma natthīti sukhumabhāvāpattiyā avasesā. Tenāha – ‘‘bhāvanāvasena sabbasukhumabhāvaṃ pattā saṅkhārā’’ti. Etanti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ, pattabbaṃ nāma hoti tādisasaṅkhārappattiyaṃ tabbohārato. Saṅkhataṃ samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katattā.
25 下文将要说到“那些沙门婆罗门,施设有情众生的断灭、坏灭、消亡”(《中部》3.25),所以当世尊在一切智中运转时,把这些观点综合起来把握,才说了“于彼”,因此解释说:“‘于彼’——在七种断灭论中,是处格。”接着要显示“向上忆念”是指忆念那些已投生到上界的众生,所以说“向上称为”等。“忆念者”:是指那些知道自己所希求却得不到的人。“系著”:就是希求。“死后”:指在他世。“如商人喻”:因为他们修行是期待获得属于生命存在的殊胜果报。“依有身怖畏”:“存在的身体”就是有身,从究竟意义上说,它是真实存在的法的集合体,也就是五取蕴。由它而生起的怖畏,就是有身怖畏。“不要竭尽”:不要走向完全灭尽。“不要沉没”:不要向下沉沦堕落。“云”:指虚空。“不要破散”:不要被击碎而散落。“以绳索系缚”:指被绳索捆绑。如坚固柱、如桩的“有身”,因为极难脱离。见行者如狗,因为它不围绕它(有身)转。见如同杖,因为它使人无力斩断烦恼。渴爱如同绳,因为它能束缚人,也因为通过作为所缘和伴随的方式而与之相连,所以说:“渴爱之绳已被引入见之杖中。”巴利
25. ‘‘Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapentī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.25) vakkhamānattā sabuddhiyaṃ viparivattamāne ekajjhaṃ gahetvā, ‘‘tatrā’’ti bhagavatā vuttanti āha – ‘‘tatrāti sattasu ucchedavādesu bhumma’’nti. Uddhaṃ saranti uddhaṃ gataṃ sarantāti taṃ dassento āha ‘‘uddhaṃ vuccatī’’tiādi. Sarantāti yattha patthenti na labhanti, taṃ jānantā. Āsattinti āsīsanaṃ. Peccāti paraloke. Vāṇijūpamā viyāti bhavapariyāpannaphalavisesāpekkhāya paṭipajjanato. Sakkāyassa bhayāti santo kāyoti sakkāyo, paramatthato vijjamāno dhammasamūhoti katvā upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ, tato bhāyanena. Mā khīyi mā parikkhayaṃ agamāsi. Mā osīdi mā heṭṭhā bhassi. Abbhanti ākāsaṃ mā undriyi mā bhijjitvā pati. Gaddulena baddho gaddulabaddho. Daḷhathambho viya khīlo viya ca sakkāyo dummocanīyato. Sā viya diṭṭhigatiko tassa anuparivattanato. Daṇḍako viya diṭṭhi chedanakaraṇāya asamatthabhāvakaraṇato. Rajju viya taṇhā bandhanato ca, ārammaṇakaraṇavasena samannāgamanavasena ca sambaddhabhāvato. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘diṭṭhidaṇḍake pavesitāya taṇhārajjuyā’’ti.
26 世尊以自己说法的善巧,随顺所化众生的意乐,把四十四种后际论者的主张按纲目归纳成五种,然后依照这个纲目来收束,说道:“就是这五种处。”在这里,因为它们是苦的因由,对执持邪见的人来说是生起的原因,所以从“处”即“原因”的意义上说,称为“这五种因”。按有想等三类以及断灭论,因此分成四种。那么,另一个“现法涅槃论”又归到哪里去了呢?因为它没有按自身形态被单独分出来,所以就追问:在已经分类的诸论中,它到底包含在哪里?其实在总纲里,它已经按自身形态被收进去了,也就是“或者有些人主张现法涅槃”。为了说明这另一个现法涅槃论包含在“一类想论”和“异类想论”中,论师说“一类……当知”,这只是随顺方便而说的。因为第一种现法涅槃论包含在异类想论里,其余四种则包含在一类想论里。巴利
26. Bhagavā attano desanāvilāsena veneyyajjhāsayavasena (catucattārīsa aparantakappikavādā tattha tattha antogadhāti) uddesavasena pañceva saṅgahetvā yathuddesaṃ nigamento, ‘‘imānevapañcāyatanānī’’ti āha. Tattha dukkhassa nimittabhāvato diṭṭhigatānaṃ kāraṇaṭṭhena āyatanatthoti vuttaṃ – ‘‘imāneva pañca kāraṇānī’’ti. Saññīādivasena tīṇi ucchedavādoti cattāri bhājitāni. Itaraṃ pana diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ kuhiṃ paviṭṭhaṃ? Sarūpato abhājitattā yathābhājitesu vādesu kattha antogadhanti pucchati. Uddese pana sarūpato gahitameva, ‘‘diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ vā paneke abhivadantī’’ti. Itaro ekattasaññīvāde nānattasaññīvāde antogadhanti dassento ‘‘ekatta…pe… veditabba’’nti āha yathāsukhañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. Paṭhamo hi diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādo nānattasaññīvāde antogadho, itare cattāro ekattasaññīvāde.
27 所谓“过去的分位所构成”,就是指由过去诸蕴的分位所构成的前际。这里说的是对过去曾住于种种法上的分别安立,所以这里的“前”字是表示过去时间的词;而离开了色等诸蕴,就没有安立分别的依托处,“际”字则是表示分位的意思。因此说“对过去分位所构成的前际作了安立”。而“作了安立”,说的是在前际中对渴爱和见解的执取加以确认、完成确立。其余类别也是如此,即“前际随观者”等。如前所说的那种类型,是指在“后际随观者”等当中所说的类型。又在每一种情况下,都因为执取“我在这里”,执取“在这里,福德与罪恶以及它们的果报被积聚”,于是依据这样那样的执取方式,施设“我”和“世间”,所以说“在色等当中执取某一个为我、为世间”。因为永远存在,所以是常。不死、常、恒久,这些都是它的同义词。因为没有死亡,所以是不死;因为没有生起,一切时候都存在,所以是常;因为坚固、不变异,所以是恒久。通过“如说”等语句,即以义释和无碍解道的经文来阐明上述含义。而这个含义,是依据五种有身见来说的:“观色为我,观受……想……行……识为我。”依据“有色”等十五种有身见,则是执取四蕴为我,把其余的法施设为“世间”,这个含义也可以得到;同样,执取一蕴为我,把其余的法施设为“世间”,这里的含义应当这样理解。以同样的方式,通过这个道理,像“在色等当中执取某一个为我、为世间,是常……恒久”这个含义已经说了;同样也指向“非常、无常、不恒久、断灭、消亡、死后不存在;常与无常两者都不是”等等含义。巴利
27.Atītakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhātanti atītaṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhātaṃ pubbantaṃ. Pubbe nivutthadhammavisayā kappanā idhādhippetā, tasmā atītakālavācako idha pubbasaddo, rūpādikhandhavinimuttañca kappanāvatthu natthi, antasaddo ca koṭṭhāsavācako. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atītakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhātaṃ pubbantaṃ kappetvā’’ti. ‘‘Kappetvā’’ti ca tasmiṃ pubbante taṇhāyanābhinivisānaṃ samatthanaṃ pariniṭṭhāpanaṃ vadati. Sesampīti ‘‘pubbantānudiṭṭhī’’ti evamādikaṃ. Pubbe vuttappakāranti ‘‘aparantānudiṭṭhino’’tiādīsu vuttappakāraṃ. Ekekasmiñca attāti āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti katvā, lokoti lokiyanti ettha puññapāpāni tabbipākā cāti katvā, taṃ taṃ gahaṇavisesaṃ upādāya paññāpanaṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā’’ti. Sabbadābhāvena sassato. Amaro nicco dhuvoti tasseva vevacanāni. Maraṇābhāvena amaro, uppādābhāvena sabbakālaṃ vattanato nicco, thiraṭṭhena vikārābhāvena dhuvo, yathāhātiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ niddesapaṭisambhidāpāḷīhi vibhāveti. Ayañca attho ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati, vedanaṃ… saññaṃ… saṅkhāre… viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.130-131) imissā pañcavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena vutto. ‘‘Rūpavanta’’ntiādikāya (paṭi. ma. 1.130-131) pana pañcadasavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena cattāro cattāro khandhe, ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññaṃ – ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti ayampi attho labbhati, tathā ekaṃ khandhaṃ, ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadaññe ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Eseva nayoti iminā yathā ‘‘rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā sassato…pe… dhuvo’’ti attho vutto; evaṃ asassato anicco adhuvo ucchijjati vinassati na hoti paraṃ maraṇā; nicco ca anicco ca nevanicco nāniccoti evamādimatthaṃ atidisati.
四种常住论:从证得者的角度分三种,从推论者的角度分一种,这样一共四种。证得宿命智的外道,如果是钝根,只能回忆许多百千生左右;如果是中根,能回忆十个坏成劫;如果是利根,能回忆四十个坏成劫,再往上就不能了。他这样回忆之后,就宣称我和世间是常住的。而推论者则宣称由推理锤炼而成、跟随探究、凭自己突发灵感的观点,即我和世间是常住的。因此说:从证得者的角度分三种,从推论者的角度分一种,这样一共四种常住论。有人问:为什么常住论不像无因生论那样分成两类呢?应当理解为:因为它已经被否定了。巴利
Cattāro sassatavādāti lābhīvasena tayo, takkīvasena ekoti evaṃ cattāro. Pubbenivāsañāṇalābhī titthiyo mandapañño anekajātisatasahassamattaṃ anussarati, majjhimapañño dasa saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappāni, tikkhapañño cattārīsa saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappāni, na tato paraṃ. So evaṃ anussaranto attā ca loko cāti abhivadati. Takkī pana takkapariyāhataṃ vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ sassato attā ca loko cāti abhivadati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘lābhīvasena tayo, takkīvasena ekoti evaṃ cattāro sassatavādā’’ti. Eteneva ca adhiccasamuppattikavādo viya sassatavādo kasmā duvidhena na vibhattoti ce? Paṭikkhittattāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在这里,对于“我与世间是常”这种说法,要说明它为什么站不住脚。如果别人所设想出来的我或世间是常住的,那么因为它不变异,不会舍弃先前的形态,所以不可能对它做出任何改变。这样一来,为了让人从不利中回头、走向有利而施设的教导,对常见论者来说就完全没用了。既然毫无变化,那教导又怎么能进行下去呢?而且,这样一来,就像不参与活动的虚空一样,布施等善行和伤害等恶行都不可能发生。同样,对常见论者来说,苦乐感受的连结也不成立,因为没有业的系缚;连生等都没有,又从何谈解脱呢?如果说:只是诸法在生起和灭去,而作者、受者等说法是依这些法而假立的。即使这样,由于不能舍弃先前的形态,一个安住不变的自我说成“只是法性”,这无法成立。或者,他那些法是自我的状态,还是与自我不同?如果不同,那么即使那些法生起,对他来说也没有任何差别。因为人们所确认的,正是那个“造作、感受、死去、再生”的主体。所以,只要他还停留在那种状态,上面说的过失就仍然存在,而所谓诸法的安立也就毫无意义了。如果相同,那么生灭的状态与自我没有差别,自我也就同样会有生灭,这样又哪里还有常住的机会呢?或者,那些法也像自我一样常住,那么系缚与解脱就都不可能存在。因此,常见论根本站不住脚。在这里,也没有任何一个论者能够对诸法的常住性说出真正清净合理的道理;而缺乏合理性的说法不会让智者的心感到满意,所以这种常见论早已被有智慧的人抛弃了。巴利
Ettha ca, ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti vāde ayamayuttatāvibhāvanā – yadi hi parena parikappito attā, loko vā sassato siyā, tassa nibbikāratāya purimarūpāvijahanato kassaci visesādhānassa kātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ahitato nivattanatthaṃ hite ca paṭipattiatthaṃ upadeso eva nippayojano siyā sassatavādino. Kathaṃ vā so upadeso pavattīyati vikārābhāvato; evañca attano ajaṭākāsassa viya dānādikiriyā hiṃsādikiriyā ca na sambhavati; tathā sukhassa dukkhassa ca anubhavananibandho eva sassatavādino na yujjati kammabaddhābhāvato, jātiādīnaṃ asambhavato kuto vimokkho. Atha pana dhammamattaṃ tassa uppajjati ceva vinassati ca, yassa vasenāyaṃ kiriyādivohāroti vadeyya. Evampi purimarūpāvijahanena avaṭṭhitassa attano dhammamattanti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ; te vā panassa dhammā avatthābhūtā tato aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā, yadi aññe, na tāhi tassa uppannāhipi koci viseso atthi. Yo hi karoti paṭisaṃvedeti cavati upapajjati cāti icchitaṃ. Tasmā tadavattho eva yathāvuttadoso, kiñca dhammakappanāpi niratthakā siyā. Atha anaññe, uppādavināsavantīhi avatthāhi anaññassa attano tāsaṃ viya uppādavināsasambhavāpattito kuto niccatāvakāso. Tāsampi vā attano viya niccatāti bandhanavimokkhānaṃ asambhavo evāti na yujjati eva sassatavādo; na cettha koci vādī dhammānaṃ sassatabhāve parisuddhaṃ yuttiṃ vattuṃ samattho atthi; yuttirahitañca vacanaṃ na paṇḍitānaṃ cittamārādhetīti viññūhi chaḍḍito evāyaṃ sassatavādoti.
七种断灭论:这里所说的“七种断灭论”,在前面已经按它们各自的形态本身展示过了。其中有两种人执取断灭见:有得者与无得者。这里的有得者,是指证得天眼智的人,他用天眼看见阿拉汉命终,却看不到他的结生。或者有些凡夫只能看见命终本身,因为缺乏前世的修行,或者没有做预备修行,所以看不到结生。他就执取断灭见,认为“就在那里那里,我彻底断灭了”。无得者则说:“谁知道他世呢?生命的范围就这么大,只到感官所能触及的限度。”他们或者因为贪著欲乐,就像那个抓着女儿手的国王一样;或者仅仅靠推论,认为“就像树叶从树上落下后不再结生,一切众生也同样归于无结生的死亡,众生如同水泡”,由此执取断灭见。其中,前面已经说过:“在人的身体、欲界天的身体、色界天的身体、四种无色界的身体中死后,为了施设众生的断灭,而说了七种断灭论。”在这里,前三种论说中说“身坏”是合理的,因为这些论说是围绕属于五蕴有的身体而生起的;但在后四种论说中,围绕属于四蕴有的身体而生起时,也说“身坏”,这就不合理了,因为无色界的有情并没有色身,不是吗?确实如此。然而,执持邪见的人是把在色有中通行的说法套用到无色有上,才说“身坏”的。正如那些执持邪见的人所施设的见解那样,世尊也如此显示。或者也可以这样理解:由于无色界的身体是由触等诸法聚集而成的无色自体,所以“身”这个说法应当理解为是指那个。巴利
Satta ucchedavādāti ettha te sarūpamattato heṭṭhā dassitā eva, tattha dve janā ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhanti lābhī ca alābhī ca. Tattha lābhī nāma dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī dibbena cakkhunā arahato cutiṃ disvā upapattiṃ apassanto. Yo vā puthujjanānampi cutimattameva daṭṭhuṃ sakkoti, pubbayogābhāvena parikammākaraṇena vā upapātaṃ daṭṭhuṃ na sakkoti. So ‘‘tattha tattheva attā ucchijjatī’’ti ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Alābhī – ‘‘ko paralokaṃ jānāti, ettako jīvavisayo, yāva indriyagocaro’’ti attano dhītuyā hatthaggaṇhanakarājā viya kāmasukhagiddhatāya vā, ‘‘yathā rukkhapaṇṇāni rukkhato patitāni na paṭisandhiyanti, evaṃ sabbepi sattā appaṭisandhikamaraṇameva gacchanti, jalabubbuḷakūpamā sattā’’ti takkamattavasena vā ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Tattha yaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaṃ – ‘‘manussattabhāve kāmāvacaradevattabhāve rūpāvacaradevattabhāve catubbidhaarūpattabhāve cavitvā sattassa ucchedapaññāpanavasena satta ucchedavādā kathitā’’ti. Tattha yuttaṃ tāva purimesu tīsu vādesu ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ; pañcavokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ attabhāvaṃ ārabbha pavattattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, na yuttaṃ catuvokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ attabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattesu catutthādīsu catūsu vādesu, ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi arūpīnaṃ kāyo atthīti? Saccametaṃ, rūpabhave pavattavohāreneva diṭṭhigatiko arūpabhavepi kāyavohāramāropetvā āha ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti. Yathā diṭṭhigatikehi diṭṭhiyo paññattā, tatheva bhagavā dassesīti. Arūpakāyabhāvato vā phassādidhammasamūhabhūte arūpattabhāve kāyaniddeso daṭṭhabbo.
这里有人这样说:那些主张“欲界天身等一切彻底断灭”的第二类论说等,因为它们的对象是未来,所以这些论说属于“后际论者”;而第一类论说确立的是当下就能见到的人类身体的断灭,因为它的对象是现在,所以不属于后际论者。如果真是这样,那么正如第二类等论说,因为对于包含在前一类论说中的那个自我,其后续一次次投生都被断除了,所以算作后际论者;经中也同样说:“然而,贤者们,这个自我并没有因此就被彻底断除。”正是由于这个道理,第一类论说也是着眼于未来人类身体的断灭,所以它同样可以算作后际论者。这样一来,一切从前际引生出来的内容,都是以施设断灭的方式在这里宣讲的,因此被归入此处对前际论者的教导中。而这些断灭论,在下文后际论者那里已经讲过了。它们之所以被放到下文后际论者中去讲,是为了说明“就在某处某处断灭,从此以后不再有延续”。因为按照他们的执见,众生确实就像水泡一样。巴利
Etthāha – ‘‘kāmāvacaradevattabhāvādiniravasesavibhavapatiṭṭhāpakānaṃ dutiyavādādīnaṃ yutto aparantakappikabhāvo anāgataddhavisayattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ; na pana diṭṭhigatika-paccakkhabhūta-manussattabhāva-samucchedapatiṭṭhāpakassa paṭhamavādassa paccuppannavisayattā’’ti. Yadi evaṃ yathā hi dutiyādivādānaṃ, purimapurimavādasaṅgahitasseva attano uttaruttarabhavopapattiyā samucchedanato yujjati aparantakappikatā, tathā ca ‘‘no ca kho, bho, ayaṃ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ anāgatasseva manussattabhāvasamucchedassa adhippetattā paṭhamavādassapi aparantakappikatā yujjati. Evaṃ sabbassapi pubbantato āgatassa ucchedapaññāpanavasena idha pubbantakappikesu desanā gatā. Ete ucchedavādā heṭṭhā aparantakappikesu desanā gatā. Ete ucchedavādā heṭṭhā aparantakappikesu tattha tattheva ucchijjati, na tato uddhaṃ pavatti atthīti dassanatthaṃ vuttā. Jalabubbuḷakūpamā hi sattāti tassa laddhi.
这里说的“此处”,是指在前际论者当中说的。就在这个人身之类的状态里,以坏灭、消亡的方式断灭。这样,后际论者着眼于未来不再生起而主张断灭,他们就被归入后际论者一类;前际论者着眼于“从过去际而来的自我就在此处断灭”,他们则被归入前际论者一类。至于“从此以后不再去”,这是从义理上显示其所含的意义。认为众生和诸行有一部分是常的,这种主张就是一分常论。这种一分常论,依从梵众天身、戏忘天身、意愤天身死后投生到这里的推理者,以及从这些天身死后投生到这里的推理者生起的方式,共有四种,所以说“有四种一分常论”。说“诸行有一部分是常”,这是依照那些被他们执为常的法,如实显示其本来面目而说的,并不是依照一分常论的见解本身而说。因为在他们的执见中,被认为常的,实际上只有无为法。正如《梵网经》中所说:“所谓心、或意、或识,这个我就是常的、坚固的、恒久的、不变易的法,它会永远如此安住。”事实上,对于一种存在,如果承认它是由诸缘造作而成的,那么即使是个神志正常的人,也不可能承认它是常的、坚固的等等。由此也说明了,那种主张“诸行依生起、坏灭、恒常而可能常、可能无常、可能不可说”等七句分别论是不合理的。巴利
Idhāti pubbantakappikesu. Idheva manussattabhāvādike ucchijjati vinaṭṭhavināsavasena. Evaṃ anāgate anuppattidassanaparānaṃ ucchedavādānaṃ aparantakappikesu gahaṇaṃ; pubbantato pana āgatassa attano idheva ucchedadassanaparānaṃ pubbantakappikesu gahaṇaṃ. Ito paraṃ na gacchatīti pana idaṃ atthato āpannassa atthassa dassanaṃ. Sattesu saṅkhāresu ca ekaccasassatanti pavatto ekaccasassatavādo . So pana brahmakāyika-khiḍḍāpadosika-manopadosikattabhāvato cavitvā idhāgatānaṃ takkino ca uppajjanavasena catubbidhoti āha ‘‘cattāro ekaccasassatavādā’’ti. ‘‘Saṅkhārekaccasassatikā’’ti idaṃ tehi sassatabhāvena gayhamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvadassanavasena vuttaṃ, na panekaccasassatikamatadassanavasena. Tassa hi sassatābhimataṃ asaṅkhatamevāti laddhi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ (dī. ni. 1.49) brahmajāle – ‘‘cittanti vā manoti vā viññāṇanti vā ayaṃ attā nicco dhuvo sassato avipariṇāmadhammo sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassatī’’ti. Na hi yassa bhāvassa paccayehi abhisaṅkhatabhāvaṃ paṭijānāti; tasseva niccadhuvādibhāvo anummattakena na sakkā paṭiññātuṃ. Etena, ‘‘uppādavayadhuvatāyuttabhāvā siyā niccā, siyā aniccā, siyā na vattabbā’’tiādinā pavattassa sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā vibhāvitā hoti.
在这里,针对《长部注》1.38,要说明它为什么不合理:如果有人说“以某种自性而说某法存在,又以那种自性而说该法不存在”等等,那就会变成不定论;如果换一种说法,就可能不是不定论。但在这里,不应该把地方不同等其他关联扯进来,因为那是全世界都公认的,没有争论。可是有些人说:“就像金罐被做成王冠时,罐性消失了,冠性生起了,但金性仍然存在;同样,一切法中,有些法消失,有些法生起,而自性却保持不变。”对这些人应当说:那个在金罐和王冠中保持不变的金,到底是什么?如果是色等,那它就像声音一样是无常的;如果是色等的集合,而所谓集合只是假名而已。对于这个仅仅作为言说而存在的东西,不能说它有、没有或常住。因为从究竟自性上来说,它根本不可得,所以不会成为不定论。诸法与法体,要么是相异的,要么是不异的。如果是相异的,那么这些法体因为相异的缘故,就不会是无常——就像色与眼识是相异的,而“眼识”这个名字也不在色上;而且,法的安立也会变得毫无意义,因为法体的常或无常根本无法成立。如果是不异的,那么与有生灭的诸法不异的法体,也应当像那些法一样有生灭,哪里还有常的余地?或者,那些法也应当像法体一样成为常住。再者,若说“不可说常也不可说无常”的自我和世间,从究竟义上被承认为存在,那就如同常等中的某一种色,或者如同灯等一样。因为对于灯等具有生灭自性的事物,不能说它们具有“不可说常不可说无常”的自性,正如命者不能说是常等中的某一种色一样。这样一来,就像七句分别论不可能成立一样,其余各句分别论也不可能成立。由此应当知道,七句分别论的主张是不合理的。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.38) ayuttatāvibhāvanā – yadi, ‘‘yena sabhāvena yo dhammo atthīti vuccati, teneva sabhāvena so dhammo natthī’’tiādinā vucceyya, siyā anekantavādo; atha aññena, siyā na anekantavādo; na cettha desantarādisambaddhabhāvo yutto vattuṃ tassa sabbalokasiddhattā vivādābhāvato. Ye pana vadanti – ‘‘yathā suvaṇṇaghaṭe makuṭe kate ghaṭabhāvo nassati, makuṭabhāvo uppajjati, suvaṇṇabhāvo tiṭṭhatiyeva, evaṃ sabbabhāvānaṃ koci dhammo nassati, koci uppajjati, sabhāvo pana tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Te vattabbā – kiṃ taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, yaṃ ghaṭe makuṭe ca avaṭṭhitaṃ? Yadi rūpādi, so saddo viya anicco, atha rūpādisamūho, samūho nāma sammutimattaṃ. Tassa vohāramattassa atthitā natthitā niccatā vā na vattabbā. Tassa paramatthasabhāvena anupalabbhanatoti anekantavādo na siyā. Dhammā ca dhammito aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā. Yadi aññe, na tesaṃ aniccatāya dhammī anicco aññattā. Na hi rūpā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ aññattā, na ca rūpe cakkhuviññāṇasaddo hoti; kiñca dhammakappanāpi niratthikā siyā dhammino niccāniccatāya asijjhanato atha anaññe; uppādavināsavantehi anaññassa dhammino tesaṃ viya uppādavināsasabbhāvato kuto niccatāvakāso, tesampi vā dhammino viya niccatāpatti siyā. Apica niccāniccanavattabbarūpo attā ca loko ca paramatthato vijjamānatāpaṭijānanato yathā niccādīnaṃ aññataraṃ rūpaṃ, yathā vā dīpādayo. Na hi dīpādīnaṃ udayabbayasabhāvānaṃ niccāniccanavattabbasabhāvatā sakkā vattuṃ jīvassa niccādīsu aññataraṃ rūpaṃ viyāti evaṃ sattabhaṅgassa viya sesabhaṅgānampi asambhavoyevāti sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā veditabbāti.
在这里,如果有人主张“自在天是常住的,其他众生是无常的”,这就是“一分常住论”,比如自在天论者这一类。如果有人主张“极微是常的、恒久的,而二微等聚合而成的东西是无常的”,这就是“行一分常住论”,比如迦那陀论者这一类。有人可能会问:在“某些法是常住的,某些法是无常的”这种说法里,如实确定了眼等是无常,这怎么会是邪见呢?谁会认为“确定眼等是无常是邪见”呢?其实,正是在这些无常法当中,对某些法固执地认为它们是常住的,这才是这里所说的邪见。而这种邪见一旦生起,对眼等无常的认知就被染污了,因为两者混杂在一起;就像混了毒的酥油,即便还能发挥它自身的作用,也不能被归入正见这一边。或者也可以说,即使已经确定眼等是无常,那些持邪见的人仍然把眼等执取为安立了“灵魂”自性的东西,所以那种认知也免不了成为邪见。正如《梵网经》(《长部》1.49)所说:“眼……乃至……身,这是我的自我”等等。这样一来,依据无为界和有为界,依次说“某些法是常住的,某些法是无常的”,即使是这种作出区分而说的人,若被指责为落入了“一分常住论”,这种指责也是没有根据的,因为这是无颠倒地通达了法的自性。巴利
Ettha ca, ‘‘issaro nicco, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā sattekaccasassatavādā; seyyathāpi issaravādādayo. ‘‘Paramāṇavo niccā dhuvā, dviaṇukādayo aniccā’’ti evaṃ pavattavādā saṅkhārekaccasassatavādā; seyyathāpi kaṇādavādādayo. Nanu ca ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti; etasmiṃ vāde cakkhādīnaṃ asassatatāsanniṭṭhānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodho eva, tayidaṃ kathaṃ micchādassananti, ko evamāha – ‘‘cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ micchādassana’’nti? Asassatesuyeva pana kesañci dhammānaṃ sassatabhāvābhiniveso idha micchādassanaṃ; tena pana ekavāre pavattamānena cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvāvabodho vidūsito saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato; visasaṃsaṭṭho viya sappimaṇḍo sakiccakāraṇāsamattatāya sammādassanapakkhe ṭhapetabbataṃ nārahati. Atha vā asassatabhāvena nicchitāpi cakkhuādayo samāropitajīvasabhāvā eva diṭṭhigati kehi gayhantīti tadavabodhassa micchādassanabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.49) – ‘‘cakkhunti vā…pe… kāyoti vā ayaṃ me attā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā asaṅkhatāya saṅkhatāya ca dhātuyā vasena yathākkamaṃ ekacce dhammā sassatā; ekacce asassatāti evaṃ pavatto vibhajjavādopi ekaccasassatavādo āpajjatīti evaṃpakārā codanā anokāsā hoti aviparītadhammasabhāvasampaṭipattibhāvato.
不死,就是不会死。那是什么?依照“这样也不适合我”等说法(《长部》1.62),见行者的见解和言语没有边际,以这不死的见解和言语作出种种动摇不定,就叫不死矫乱。他有这个,所以是不死矫乱者。或者,不死是一种鱼,它在水里浮沉游动,始终抓不住;同样,这种论说也东游西荡,抓不住,所以叫不死矫乱,他就是不死矫乱者。这种论说因为妄语习行、欲贪和愚痴这四种原因而有四种,所以说“四种不死矫乱者已被指出”。难道这四种不死矫乱者,对善等法、他世和三际等不能如实了知,在种种场合被提问时,只是以回避问题来矫乱,怎么会是见行者呢?毕竟不能因为一个不想说话的人、不了解所问义理的人那样只是回避提问,就说他是见行者。其实并不是仅仅因为回避提问就说他是见行者,而是因为有邪执。正是由于执取常住而陷入邪执,那些钝根的人无法如实通达善等法、他世和三际等,自己不了知义理,没有能力使他人了知,再加上害怕妄语等过失,所以才作出矫乱。因此,他的这种论说被归入常住见的范畴。或者,由于不了知福与罪及其果报,由于不信受,心想“针对这个问题的回避本身就是合理而善巧的”,于是产生忍可和喜好并执取,应当看作这是一种单独的见,就像七种断灭见一样。正是如此,才说“见行者的见解和言语没有边际”。那么,它怎么被归入常住见呢?因为不是以断灭的方式执取。由于世间争论太多,没有谁是诸法的如实知者;然而,以“就是这样”的声音,对诸法的深思在世间是无始以来就有的。因此,从执取的角度看,这里也能得到常住见的残余。巴利
Na maratīti amarā. Kā sā? ‘‘Evantipi me no’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.62) nayena pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ca vācā ca, amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya vividho khepoti amarāvikkhepo. So etassa atthīti amarāvikkhepo. Atha vā amarāti ekā macchajāti, sā ummujjananimmujjanādivasena udake sandhāvamānā gāhaṃ na gacchati; evamevaṃ ayampi vādo ito cito ca sandhāvati, gāhaṃ nāgacchatīti amarāvikkhepo, so eva amarāvikkhepiko. Svāyaṃ vādo musāvādaanuyogachandarāgamohahetukatāya catudhā pavattoti āha – ‘‘cattāro amarāvikkhepikā vuttā’’ti. Nanu cettha (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.65-66) catubbidhopi amarāvikkhepiko kusalādike dhamme paralokattikādīni ca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhamāno, tattha tattha pañhaṃ puṭṭho pucchāya vikkhepanamattaṃ āpajjatīti tassa kathaṃ diṭṭhigatikabhāvo. Na hi avattukāmassa viya pucchitamatthaṃ ajānantassa vikkhepakaraṇamattena diṭṭhigatikatā yuttāti? Na hevaṃ pucchāvikkhepakaraṇamattena tassa diṭṭhigatikatā icchitā, atha kho micchābhinivesena. Sassatavasena micchābhiniviṭṭhoyeva hi mandabuddhitāya kusalādidhamme paralokattikādīni ca, yāthāvato appaṭipajjamāno attanā aviññātassa atthassa paraṃ viññāpetuṃ asamatthatāya musāvādādibhayena ca vikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti. Tathā hissa vādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho vutto. Atha vā puññapāpānaṃ, tabbipākānañca anavabodhena, asaddahanena ca, ‘‘tabbisayāya pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇaṃyeva yuttaṃ sundarañcā’’ti, khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā abhinivisantassa uppannā visuṃyevekā esā diṭṭhi sattabhaṅgadiṭṭhi viyāti daṭṭhabbā. Tathā ceva vuttaṃ – ‘‘pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā cā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61). Kathaṃ panassā sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho? Ucchedavasena anabhinivesato. ‘‘Natthi koci dhammānaṃ yathābhūtavedī vivādabahulattā lokassa; ‘evameva’nti pana saddantarena dhamme nijjhānanā anādikālikā loke’’ti gāhavasena sassatalesopettha labbhatiyeva.
“边”是指自性到达尽头、走到终点的地方,也就是界限。这个界限是它所有的,所以叫“有边”。因此说“有边际”。应当这样连接:对于还没有把遍禅修到广大境界的人来说,会生起这样的想法。第二种主张是“世界无边”。第三种主张是“世界也有边也无边”。第四种主张是“世界也非有边也非无边”。针对这四种主张者,《梵网经》中说:“有边无边论者以四种根据来安立世界有边无边。”其中,前三种主张者因为谈论边性、无边性以及亦有边亦无边性,所以是有边无边论者。但最后一种是以否定这两者的方式来说的,为什么也算有边无边论者呢?正因为他以否定两者为说。因为否定的论说也仍然以有边无边为对象,是围绕这个而展开的。另一些论师说:“就像在第三种主张中,通过混合,这个人的有边性和无边性可以同时成立;同样,在推理者的主张中,通过时间上的区分,由于两者互相否定,其实说的就是两者。怎么说呢?否定了有边性,就说为无边性;否定了无边性,就说为有边性;而有边与无边的第三种主张状态,是因为意许了时间上的区分。这里说的是:这个被称为‘世界’的自我,有时被那些修禅者以他们所证得的殊胜境界视为无边而随念;所以是‘非有边’。又因为有时被他们同样视为有边而随念;所以又不是‘无边’。”就像以随闻推理的方式这样理解,也应当按同样道理,随其相应,以宿命忆念、推理等方式来配合。这个推理者因为还没有把遍禅修到广大境界,对于所缘影像的广大状态,由于在广大时不能亲自证知,就停留在随闻等仅仅听闻的层面上,于是否定说“非有边”;而在还没有广大的时候,则说“非无边”。但并不是像“非有想非无想”那样,因为边性与无边性彻底不存在。这一点必须这样理解,否则第四种主张就会落入散乱一边。因为离开有边性、无边性以及这两者,并没有自我存在的另一种形态;而推理者的主张是依道理而行的,并且由于时间上的区分,这两者在同一时刻也不可能同时成立。接着的四组是:从“一向有想”等而来的有想四组。巴利
Amati gacchati ettha sabhāvo osānanti anto, mariyādo, so etassa atthīti antavā. Tenāha ‘‘sapariyanto’’ti. Avaḍḍhitakasiṇassa puggalassa evaṃ hotīti yojanā. Dutiyavādo ‘‘anantavā loko’’ti vādo. Tatiyavādo ‘‘antavā ca anantavā cā’’ti vādo. Catutthavādo ‘‘nevantavā nānantavā’’ti vādo. Ete eva cattāro vādino sandhāya brahmajāle (dī. ni. 1.53) – ‘‘antānantikā antānantaṃ lokassa paññapenti catūhi vatthūhī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.53) yuttaṃ tāva purimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vādīnaṃ antattañca anantattañca antānantattañca ārabbha pavattavādattā antānantikattaṃ. Pacchimassa pana tadubhayapaṭisedhavasena pavattavādattā kathamantānantikattanti? Tadubhayapaṭisedhavasena pavattavādattā eva. Yasmā paṭisedhavādopi antānantavisayo eva taṃ ārabbha pavattattā. Apare āhu – ‘‘yathā tatiyavāde sambhedavasena etasseva antavantatā anantatā ca sambhavati, evaṃ takkīvādepi kālabhedavasena ubhayasambhavato aññamaññapaṭisedhena ubhayaññeva vuccati. Kathaṃ? Antavantatāpaṭisedhena hi anantatā vuccati, anantatāpaṭisedhena ca antavantatā, antānantānañca tatiyavādabhāvo kālabhedassa adhippetattā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti yasmā ayaṃ lokasaññito attā jhāyīhi adhigatavisesehi ananto kadāci sakkhi diṭṭho anusuyyati; tasmā nevantavā. Yasmā pana tehi eva kadāci antavā sakkhi diṭṭho anusuyyati, tasmā na pana anantavā’’ti. Yathā ca anussutitakkīvasena, evaṃ jātissaratakkiādīnañca vasena yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhi takkiko avaḍḍhitabhāvapubbakattā paṭibhāganimittānaṃ vaḍḍhitabhāvassa vaḍḍhitakālavasena apaccakkhakāritāya anussavādimatte ṭhatvā – ‘‘nevantavā’’ti paṭikkhipati, avaḍḍhitakālavasena pana ‘‘nānanto’’ti. Na pana antavantatānantatānaṃ accantamabhāvena yathā taṃ ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti, avassañca etaṃ evaṃ viññātabbaṃ, aññathā vikkhepapakkhaṃyeva bhajeyya catutthavādo. Na hi antavantatānantatātadubhayavinimutto attano pakāro atthi, takkīvādī ca yuttimaggako, kālabhedavasena ca tadubhayampi ekasmiṃ na na yujjatīti. Anantaracatukkanti ekattasaññīti āgatasaññīcatukkaṃ.
“一向乐”就是纯粹只有乐。他的那种乐不与苦混杂,所以经文说“无间乐”。“纯粹只有乐”这句话,是就乐占多数而说的。“过去七生”这句,是因为从此以后无法用宿命智去回忆,所以才这样说。“同类的”就是指具有乐的身体。“这样具有乐”,是说:以宿命智回忆那乐自体的人,即使在过去的生中也是如此——就像在这里,被苦所触的人回忆那乐自体一样。巴利
Ekantasukhīti ekanteneva sukhī. Taṃ panassa sukhaṃ dukkhena avomissaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘nirantarasukhī’’ti. Ekantasukhamevāti idaṃ sukhabahulataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atītāsu sattasu jātīsūti idaṃ tato paraṃ jātissarañāṇena anussarituṃ na sakkāti katvā vuttaṃ. Tādisamevāti sukhasamaṅgimeva attabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ sukhasamaṅgī’’ti taṃ anussarantassa jātissarassa atītajātiyampi idha viya dukkhaphuṭṭhassa taṃ anussarantassa.
“一切”是指那些获得禅那的人和那些善于推理的人。“如是”这个词,是把“一切”这个短语拉过来(与前面连接)。欲界的不苦不乐受,是不广大的、不明显的,所以说“依第四禅”。第四禅是它的因,或者由第四禅而投生,所以叫“第四禅的”。“中庸者的”:指处于中庸状态、以中庸受为主的。他回忆起自己过去曾处于中庸状态、曾达到中庸。一分常住论者:就是被称为持一分常住论主张的人。因为是以人为立足点来说的,所以叫一分常住论者。其余的情况也是同样的道理。无因生论被归入常住论之中,因此说“两种无因生论者”。巴利
Sabbesampīti lābhīnaṃ takkīnampi. Tathāti iminā ‘‘sabbesampī’’ti idaṃ padaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Kāmāvacaraṃ nāma adukkhamasukhaṃ anuḷāraṃ avibhūtanti āha ‘‘catutthajjhānavasenā’’ti. Catutthajjhānaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ etassa atthi, tena vā nibbattanti catutthajjhānikaṃ. Majjhattassāti majjhattabhūtassa majjhattavedanābahulassa. Majjhattabhūtaṭṭhānameva attano majjhattatāpattameva bhūtapubbaṃ anussarantassa. Ekaccasassatikāti ekaccasassatavādino vuttā. Puggalādhiṭṭhānena hi ekaccasassatikā. Esa nayo sesesupi. Adhiccasamuppannavādo sassatavādasamuddiṭṭhoti katvā ‘‘dve adhiccasamuppannikā’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
28 “见拔出”是指:为了显示前面所说的那些见解并不能导向解脱,所以把它们拔掉。“只在自己身上生起的智”是指不依靠他人、只在自己内部生起的智慧。这个智是自身亲证的,所以说“现证智”。就像黄金因为去除了杂质而变得纯净,智慧也因为去除了烦恼染污而变得清净,所以说“清净,就是没有污染”。因为烦恼的黑暗已经破除,所以它光明灿烂,因此说“洁白,就是光辉”;这在外道教法里也能存在,因为禅那是可以成就的。他们声称“我们知道这个道理”,也就是抱着“我和世界是常住的,只有这是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”这种错误执取,不断增长那无知的部分,然后针对那样执取的观点说“我们在这个道理上知道”,就这样把邪执中根本不存在的智的部分硬塞进去、强行安立。那不是智,这叫邪见。那为什么叫邪见呢?因为它是通过“我和世界是常住的”等等说法而形成了错误的固执。因此说“那也是……道理”。那作为见的亲依止的智,就是针对它而说“因为只有了知的特征,所以仅仅是智的部分”。智确实会成为见的亲依止,不论是对获得它的人,还是对其他人,都会随着各自错误的固执而那样生起。因为不超越、不越过,所以叫“不逾越”;因为不共,所以不被他法超越,这就是“不逾越”,由此而来。因为取是它的缘,也就是作为取的存在条件。这里是以果的转起方式来说取。如果《梵网经》里提到的一切见在这里也都说了,那么这样一来,这部经就和《梵网经》完全一样了,所以说“然而在《梵网经》中”等等。由于有“除了色、除了受,只围着身见转”这样的说法,所以这里已经包含了身见。《梵网经》所说的六十二见,因为在这里都已经包含,所以《梵网经》也就等于已经说了。常见和断见的固执,是以我执为前提的,因为它们是依“我是常住的、我是断灭的”这样而转起的。巴利
28.Diṭṭhuddhāranti yathāvuttānaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aniyyānikabhāvadassanavasena paduddharaṇaṃ. Paccattaṃyeva ñāṇanti aparappaccayaṃ attaniyeva ñāṇaṃ. Taṃ pana attapaccakkhaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘paccakkhañāṇa’’nti. Suvaṇṇassa viya dosāpagamena upakkilesavigamena ñāṇassa visuddhanti āha ‘‘parisuddhanti nirupakkilesa’’nti. Kilesandhakāravigamato sappabhāsamujjalameva hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘pariyodātanti pabhassara’’nti bāhirasamayasmimpi honti jhānassa samijjhanato. Mayamidaṃ jānāmāti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti ca micchāgāhavasena aññāṇabhāgameva paribrūhetvā tato eva yathāgahitaṃ gāhaṃ sandhāya – ‘‘mayamidaṃ atthaṃ tattha jānāmā’’ti evaṃ tattha micchāgāhe avijjamānaṃ ñāṇakoṭṭhāsaṃ otārentiyeva anuppavesentiyeva. Na taṃ ñāṇaṃ, micchādassanaṃ nāmetaṃ, kiṃ pana taṃ micchādassanaṃ nāma? Sassato attā ca loko cātiādinā micchābhinivesabhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘tadapi…pe… attho’’ti. Yaṃ taṃ diṭṭhiyā upanissayabhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ, taṃ sandhāyāha – ‘‘jānanamattalakkhaṇattā ñāṇabhāgamattamevā’’ti. Ñāṇampi hi diṭṭhiyā upanissayo hotiyeva lābhino itarassa ca tathā tathā micchābhinivesato. Anupātivattanato anatikkamanato. Asādhāraṇato na upātivattanti etenāti anupātivattanaṃ, tato. Upādānapaccayatoti upādānassa paccayabhāvato. Etena phalūpacāreneva upādānamāha. Yadi brahmajāle āgatā sabbāpi diṭṭhiyo idha kathitā honti, evaṃ sante idaṃ suttaṃ brahmajālasuttena ekasadisanti āha – ‘‘brahmajāle panā’’tiādi. ‘‘Aññatra rūpaṃ aññatra vedanā sakkāyaṃyeva anuparidhāvantī’’ti vacanato idha sakkāyadiṭṭhi āgatā. Brahmajālaṃ kathitameva hoti tattha āgatānaṃ dvāsaṭṭhiyāpi diṭṭhīnaṃ idhāgatattā. Sassatucchedābhiniveso attābhinivesapubbako, ‘‘attā sassato attā ucchedo’’ti pavattanato.
30 “展示六十二……见”:那么,这个意思怎么由“诸比丘,在此,有一类人……”这样的经文显示出来呢?是通过说明未断除有身见的人如何执取关于过去与未来的见解来显示的。通过舍弃,也就是通过镇伏。在“从第四禅灭,成就并住于第三禅”这句话里,并不是说已退失第四禅的人会生起第三禅,而是说从第三禅出定的人以及从第四禅出定的人,以逆次第的方式可以生起第三禅。因此说“然而在此处……”等。应当知道如此具足:“远离,喜便灭”这句话,就像“无味乐灭”那里一样,是依出定灭而说的。所谓下劣禅所摄的忧,是指与盖相应的忧,因为这种忧能破坏禅那。堪业状态:就像证得等至一样,在进入等至的状态中具有能作诸业的堪任性。因为缺乏喜悦,所以说犹如忧。再次提到的“远离生喜”的喜,是指第二禅的喜。何处阴影舍弃:就是那个地方被阳光所征服,阴影便舍弃。那里,“阳光下的阴影”是以处所说、名为阳光的所造色被舍弃之处。因此说“于彼处……”等。巴利
30.Dvāsaṭṭhi…pe… dassetunti kathaṃ panāyamattho ‘‘idha, bhikkhave, ekacco’’tiādipāḷiyā dassito hotīti? Appahīnasakkāyadiṭṭhikassa pubbantāparantadiṭṭhiupādiyanajotanato. Pariccāgenāti vikkhambhanena. Catutthajjhānanirodhā tatiyajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti ettha na parihīnacatutthajjhānassa tatiyajjhānaṃ bhavati, tatiyajjhānā vuṭṭhitassa pana catutthajjhānā vuṭṭhitassa ca tatiyaṃ paṭilomanayena sambhavati. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃpanetthā’’tiādi. Evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbanti ‘‘pavivekā pīti nirujjhatī’’ti idaṃ, ‘‘nirāmisasukhassanirodhā’’ti ettha viya vuṭṭhānanirodhavasena vuttanti veditabbanti attho. Hīnajjhānapariyādānakadomanassanti nīvaraṇasahagatadomanassamāha. Tañhi jhānapariyādānakaraṃ. Kammanīyabhāvoti samāpattiṃ patto viya samāpattisamāpajjanabhāve kammakkhamabhāvo. Somanassavidhurattā domanassaṃ viyāti domanassanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Uppajjati pavivekā pītī’’ti puna vuttā pīti jhānadvayapīti. Yaṃ ṭhānaṃ chāyā jahatīti yaṃ padesaṃ ātapena abhibhuyyamānaṃ chāyā jahati. Tattha ātape chāyāti padesena ātapasaññitānaṃ bhūtasaṅkhatānaṃ pahānaṭṭhānamāha. Tenāha ‘‘yasmiṃ ṭhāne’’tiādi.
31 所谓无饵之乐,指的是第三禅的乐,因为它已经远远舍弃了欲饵。巴利
31.Nirāmisaṃ sukhanti tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ dūrasamussāritakāmāmisattā.
32 不苦不乐:是指第四禅的受,而不是随便哪一种舍受。巴利
32.Adukkhamasukhanti catutthajjhānavedanaṃ, na yaṃ kiñci upekkhāvedanaṃ.
33 不执取:不以“我所”的方式执取任何东西。与涅槃相应:对于证得涅槃是有益的,或者说,因为对涅槃不违逆、是唯一能导向它的善巧方便,所以叫相应。因此说“是助益的”。一切处:指一切三地之法。此:指如前所说的止修习对烦恼的镇伏。既然没有在一切处让爱着干涸,怎么能说它成了涅槃的助益之道呢?或者它根本不成——这是言下之意。一切处:又指前际随观见等一切方面。以不执取的方式:指不以渴爱的执取去执取。因为当渴爱的执取被解除时,与它一体的邪见执取和慢执取也就干了。对这样的人,通往涅槃的道就在近处,不在远处。所以说“成了助益之道”。对这样的人,“我是寂静的”等随观属于慢增上的范畴,因此说“称说”,即由慢而指责。执取这个:因为没有限定的缘故,所以说乃至有十八种。其余词句也是同样的道理。当有见取时,其余诸取的生起虽未明说也自然成立,所以只举此为例。巴利
33.Niggahaṇoti mamaṃkārabhāvena kiñcipi agaṇhanto. Nibbānassa sappāyanti nibbānādhigamassa, nibbānasseva vā avilomavasena ekantikupāyatāya sappāyaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘upakārabhūta’’nti. Sabbatthāti sabbesu tebhūmakadhammesu. Etanti etaṃ yathāvuttasamathabhāvanāya kilesānaṃ vikkhambhanaṃ. Sabbattha nikantiyā asukkhāpitattā kathaṃ nibbānassa upakārapaṭipadā nāma jātaṃ? Na jāyate vātyadhippāyo. Sabbatthāti pubbantānudiṭṭhiādike sabbasmiṃ. Aggaṇhanavasenāti taṇhāgāhena aggahaṇavasena. Yattha hi taṇhāgāho vimocito, tattha diṭṭhimānaggāhā sukkhā viya honti tadekaṭṭhabhāvato. Tādisassa nibbānagāminī paṭipadā eva āsanne, na dūre. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘upakārapaṭipadā nāma jāta’’nti. Tādisassa ca santohamasmītiādikā samanupassanā adhimānapakkhe tiṭṭhatīti āha – ‘‘abhivadatīti abhimānena upavadatī’’ti. Idameva upādiyatīti niyamābhāvato ‘‘aṭṭhārasavidhampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sesapadepi eseva nayo. Diṭṭhupādāne sati sesaupādānasambhavo avuttasiddhoti tadeva uddhaṭaṃ.
对于那个处,应当了知:涅槃是灭的因,所以应当了知涅槃。所谓“二处”,就是眼处等二处。这是根据所化众生的意乐,用遮遣的方式指示涅槃。巴利
Se āyatane veditabbeti nirodhassa kāraṇaṃ nibbānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dvinnaṃ āyatanānanti cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ dvinnaṃ āyatanānaṃ. Paṭikkhepena nibbānaṃ dassitaṃ veneyyajjhāsayavasena.
无著是指不依住。从此是指从此涅槃。流是指渴爱。通过遮遣行是指通过遮遣作为行的一部分的四大种。巴利
Nagādhatīti na patiṭṭhāti. Atoti asmā nibbānā. Sarāti taṇhā. Saṅkhārapaṭikkhepenāti saṅkhārekadesabhūtānaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ paṭikkhepena.
“识”是指应当以殊胜的智慧去了知的。正因如此,它是不可见的,不是眼识所能认识的,不是感官的对象。“无边”是指消失,意思就是恒常。“周遍光明”:因为烦恼的黑暗不存在,所以从一切方面都光明遍照。或者读作“周遍堕落”,意思是从一切处堕入的渡口。这是说,应当从被称为四十种业处的渡口下去,进入不死之湖。于不执取任何法而解脱之处,就是“无取解脱”,这是指涅槃。通过它而在无执取中解脱,就是“无取解脱”,这是指最上道。然而,由于阿拉汉果以无取解脱为究竟,所以也称为无取解脱。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Viññāṇanti visiṭṭhena ñāṇena jānitabbaṃ. Tato eva anidassanaṃ acakkhuviññeyyaṃ anindriyagocaraṃ. Anantanti antarahitaṃ, niccanti attho. Sabbato pabhanti kilesandhakārābhāvato ca samantato pabhassaraṃ. ‘‘Sabbato papa’’nti vā pāṭho, sabbato patatitthanti attho. Cattārīsakammaṭṭhānasaṅkhātehi titthehi otaritvā anupavisitabbaṃ amatasaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Anupādā kañci dhammaṃ aggahetvā vimuccanti etthāti anupādāvimokkho, nibbānaṃ. Anupādā vimuccati etenāti anupādāvimokkho, aggamaggo. Anupādāvimokkhantikatāya pana arahattaphalaṃ anupādāvimokkhoti vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第3篇 金提经的注释巴利
3. Kintisuttavaṇṇanā
34 “有”是指小的,“非有”是指大的。这里的“a”这个前缀确实有增大的意思,就像“抑制与非抑制”“果与非果”等例子那样。所以“有非有因”就是小有或大有的因,意思是正在期盼它。因此说:“在各种各样的有中,我将感受快乐”等等。巴利
34.Bhavoti paritto. Abhavoti mahanto. Vuddhiattho hi ayaṃ a-kāro, ‘‘saṃvarāsaṃvaro, phalāphala’’ntiādīsu viya, tasmā bhavābhavahetūti khuddakassa mahantassa vā bhavassa hetu, taṃ paccāsīsamānoti attho. Tenāha – ‘‘tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave sukhaṃ vedissāmī’’tiādi.
35 凡夫会在出世间的菩提分法上产生争论,所以说:“所说的正是世间和出世间。”因为世间的菩提分法也是证得出世间法的近因和殊胜因,所以它比其他世间法更殊胜,因此笼统地说“在这三十七菩提分法中”。从意义上有差别,就是说菩提分法在意义上有所不同,因为它们是被同等证得的。并不是要修习身等,而只应修习念。从字音上也有差别。也是因为这个理由,也是因为这个道理。现在为了说明这个道理,就说“义与字音”等。其中,“调和”是指依据经典来调和,也就是用经典中的语句来调和。“否则”是指从别处,脱离真实而执取,意思是不如实地安立。“错误安立”是指不如实地安立。义与字音正是使人了知的原因,因为无颠倒的义和音声都能使人觉悟。巴利
35. Lokuttarabodhipakkhiyadhamme uddissa puthujjanānaṃ vivādo sambhavatīti āha – ‘‘lokiyalokuttarāva kathitā’’ti. Lokiyāpi hi bodhipakkhiyadhammā lokuttaradhammādhigamassa āsannakāraṇattā visesakāraṇanti yāva aññehi lokiyadhammehi abhivisiṭṭhoti katvā, ‘‘imesu sattatiṃsabodhipakkhiyadhammesū’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ. Atthato nānaṃ hotīti atthato bhedo hoti bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ samadhigatattā. Na hi kāyādayo bhāvetabbā, satiyeva pana bhāvetabbāti. Byañjanato nānaṃ bhedaṃ. Imināpi kāraṇenāti imāyapi yuttiyā. Idāni taṃ yuttiṃ dassento – ‘‘atthañca byañjanañcā’’tiādimāha . Tattha samānetvāti suttantarato samānetvā, suttantarapadehi ca samānetvā. Aññathāti aññato, bhūtato apagataṃ katvāti attho. Micchā ropitabhāvoti ayāthāvato ṭhapitabhāvo. Atthañca byañjanañca viññāpanakāraṇamevāti aviparītatthassa saddassa ca bujjhanahetutāya.
37 37. 在这里,当法与律的语境中正念本身被认定为念处时,从意义上说是相符的,因为意义被如实地把握了。由于并非同一语言表达,所以在音节上有差异;为了显示这种因词性差别和言辞差别而造成的不同,他说:“你们错误地把它安立为‘念处’或‘诸念处’。”“微小”是指极微小、轻微,不是当作重大、加重的东西来安立,而是把本应不加重、无声音之处安立为加重、有声音,这样就没有前面所说的过失,因此他说“能够证得寂灭”。巴利
37. Idha dhammavinayaṭṭhāne satiyeva satipaṭṭhānanti gahitā, atthato sameti nāma yāthāvato atthassa gahitattā. Asabhāvaniruttibhāvato byañjanato nānattanti taṃ liṅgabhedena vacanabhedena ca dassento, ‘‘satipaṭṭhānoti vā satipaṭṭhānāti vā micchā ropethā’’ti āha. Appamattakanti aṇumattaṃ sallahukaṃ, na garutaraṃ adhanitaṃ katvā vattabbampi dhanitaṃ ghosavantaṃ katvā ropite vuttadosābhāvatoti tenāha – ‘‘nibbutiṃ pattuṃ sakkā hotī’’ti.
为了说明音节上的错误安立并不会造成特别的障碍,那位长老在讲完关于四道的问题之后就直接入了般涅槃。这是针对经文的音节而说的:“然而只是少许……”巴利
Byañjanassa micchāropanaṃ na visesantarāyakaraṃ hotīti ñāpanatthaṃ, catusu maggesu pañhaṃ kathetvāva parinibbuto. Suttantabyañjanaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ – ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panā’’ti.
38 那么,在第四轮中,争论为什么会产生呢?意思是说:他们的说法在义理和文句上都完全一致。所谓“因为想而有争论”,是说虽然义理和文句都一致,但他们的想并不清净,争论正是由于这种想而产生的。为了说明这一点,就说了“我……”等话。“我说这是念处,他说这是念处”——他们就这样形成了认识;为了指出这个意思,所以说“这道理是一样的”。巴利
38.Atha catutthavāre vivādo kasmā jāto? Yāvatā nesaṃ vacanaṃ atthato ceva sameti byañjanato cāti adhippāyo. Saññāya vivādoti kiñcāpi sameti atthato ceva byañjanato ca, saññā pana nesaṃ avisuddhā, tāya saññāya vasena vivādo jātoti dassento ‘‘aha’’ntiādimāha. Ahaṃ satipaṭṭhānanti vadāmi, ayaṃ satipaṭṭhānoti vadatīti evaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇaṃ hotīti imamatthaṃ, ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati.
39 不应为了指责而冲动”的意思是:不应当急急忙忙地去指责。说“因此”,是因为有些人本性易怒,会这样顶撞回去。“不执取见者”:由于执取之后不固执己见,所以叫“不执取见者”,也就是不牢牢抓住自己见解的人。“犹如投入者”:就像吞下去投入一样。巴利
39.Na codanatthāya vegāyitabbanti sīghaṃ sīghaṃ na codanā kātabbāti attho. Tasmāti yasmā ekacco kodhanabhāvena evaṃ paṭipphari, tasmā. Anādānadiṭṭhīti ādiyitvā anabhinivisanato anādānadiṭṭhī adaḷhaggāhī. Pakkhipanto viyāti gilitvā pakkhipanto viya.
“伤害”是指对心的打击,就像斧头砍伤一样。“犹如受伤处被触碰”:就像触碰伤口会生起痛苦那样,心的痛苦也是由心受到打击而生起的。即使说了两遍才回答,一个真正善于放下的人,在被指责的当下就会立刻回答——这就是这里的意思。而从回答的方式来看,也会有身心的疲惫。所谓“这样的状态”,是说即使对方不立刻回答而指责他,那些话虽然会变成伤害之语,他仍然保持不嗔怒等本性。巴利
Upaghātoti cittappaghāto pharasupaghāto viya. Vaṇaghaṭṭitassa viyāti vaṇe ghaṭṭitassa viya dukkhuppatti cittadukkhuppatti. Dve vāre vatvāpi visajjetīti suppaṭinissaggī evaṃ pageva coditamatte vissajjeti ceti adhippāyo . Kathanavasena ca kāyacittakilamatho. Evarūpoti sahasā avissajjentena codakassa vihesāvādo hutvāpi akkodhanādisabhāvo.
“舍”是指:那个人会因自己的业而被看清,所以对他采取不干涉、不搭理的态度。所谓“轻视舍”,就是对这种不守规矩的行为没有保持不干涉的态度。巴利
Upekkhāti sakena kammena paññāyissatīti tasmiṃ puggale ajjhupekkhaṇā. Upekkhaṃ atimaññati nāma tassa anācārassa anajjhupekkhaṇato.
40 40. 所谓“语行”,是指为了离间而用别的方式改动说法。“见诤”是指因为执持两端而形成的见解。而这种见诤是心不悦的状态,也是让导师心不悦的状态。“争吵”是因为争端生起而引发的纷争,是口角争执的前阶段。巴利
40.Vacanasañcāroti pesuññavasena aññathāvacanupasaṃhāro. Diṭṭhipaḷāsoti yugaggāhavasena laddhi. Sā pana cittassa anārādhaniyabhāvo satthucittassa anārādhakabhāvo. Kalahoti adhikaraṇuppādavasena pavatto viggaho bhaṇḍanassa pubbabhāgo.
因为什么原因呢?因为那种法,因为导师的教导。正是针对这一点才说:“‘法’指的是应当随念的法。”这里,就是在“法及随法”这一句里。“法”指正自觉者那样宣说出来的解说,依靠它,陷入争论的人能够达成共识。因此说:“令那些比丘达成共识。”那解说本身,由比丘说出来、被随顺奉行,就是随法。因此说:“那就是在解说。”“任何人”就是无论谁。“具有同等法的人”就是有正当理由的人。这里的“什么”一词是另一个意思,所以说“其他/别的”。“他的”意思是:像前面所说的那样行道的比丘,他的行道不应被任何人呵责。其余一切都很容易理解。巴利
Yena kāraṇenāti yena dhammena satthusāsanena. Tameva hi sandhāya vadati – ‘‘dhammoti sāraṇīyadhammo adhippeto’’ti. Etthāti ‘‘dhammassa cānudhamma’’nti ettha. Dhammoti sambuddhassa tassa tathā pavattaṃ byākaraṇaṃ yathā vivādāpannā saññattiṃ gacchanti. Tenāha – ‘‘tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ saññattikaraṇa’’nti. Tadeva byākaraṇaṃ anudhammoti bhikkhunā vuccamāno anupavatto dhammo. Tenāha – ‘‘tadeva byākaroti nāmā’’ti. Kocīti yo koci. Sahadhammiko sakāraṇo. Aññattho ayaṃ kiṃ saddoti āha ‘‘añño’’ti. Assāti vuttanayena paṭipannabhikkhuno, tassa paṭipatti na kenaci garahaṇīyā hotīti attho. Sesaṃ sabbaṃ suviññeyyameva.
《萨玛嘎马经》的注释巴利
4. Sāmagāmasuttavaṇṇanā
41 已经生起两派的:就是已经产生分裂、已经出现分歧的。已经分成两派的:就是达到了变成两种状态的地步。诤论:因为用这个来责骂、侮辱,所以叫诤论,也就是内心对立。那就是诤论。法和律:指佛陀的教法。被刺伤:被口舌之矛刺中。与我一致:我说的话前后连贯、顺畅、衔接紧密、与义理相合。因此说“与义理相合”。已经习惯的:就是已经串习了的。被反转的:因为看出矛盾而被反转,也就是被反转、被破坏的意思。因此说“由于长时间……中略……被反转”。到处去寻找吧,意思是到各处去学习。如果你有能力,现在就把我套住的错谬解开。唯有死亡:因为互相杀害,所以只剩下死亡。巴利
41.Dvedhikajātāti jātadvedhikā sañjātabhedā. Dvejjhajātāti duvidhabhāvaṃ pattā. Bhaṇḍanti paribhāsanti etenāti bhaṇḍanaṃ, viruddhacittatā. Tanti bhaṇḍanaṃ. Dhammavinayanti pāvacanaṃ. Vitujjantā mukhasattīhi. Sahitaṃ meti mayhaṃ vacanaṃ sahitaṃ siliṭṭhaṃ pubbāparasambandhaṃ atthayuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘atthasaṃhita’’nti. Adhiciṇṇanti āciṇṇaṃ. Viparāvattanti virodhadassanavasena parāvattitaṃ, parāvattaṃ dūsitanti attho. Tenāha – ‘‘cirakālavasena…pe… nivatta’’nti. Pariyesamāno cara, tattha tattha gantvā sikkhāhīti attho. Sace sakkosi, idānimeva mayā veṭhitadosaṃ nibbeṭhehi. Maraṇamevāti aññamaññaghātavasena maraṇameva.
这些是尼乾陀若提子的弟子,也就是尼干陀派的人。不过,因为他们是他的弟子,所以经文说“在弟子们当中”。从先前的修行方式退转回来,就叫“退回”;他们的本性就是这种退转,所以是“本性退转者”。因此经文说“本性就是退转”。 “叙说”是对义理的讲解。“宣示”是引用理由和譬喻来让人理解。它不能导向寂静,所以叫“不导向寂静”;那本身就是“不导向寂静的性质”,说的就是这个意思。由于它高高耸立而成为安立的基础,所以叫“塔”,也叫“安立处”。因此经文说“破塔就是毁坏的安立处”。或者,塔也可以理解为法的出离状态,因为它以战胜其他法而高高耸立的含义得名。这种出离状态在尼干陀的教派中,虽然被某些人认为是未破灭的,实际上已经破灭、完全不存在,所以叫“破塔”。这种出离状态本来是那些想从轮回之苦中解脱的人的皈依处,但在那里并不存在,所以叫“无皈依”;在“破塔、无皈依”这句话中,意思应当这样理解。巴利
Nāṭaputtassa imeti nāṭaputtiyā. Te pana tassa sissāti āha ‘‘antevāsikesū’’ti. Purimapaṭipattito paṭinivattanaṃ paṭivānaṃ, taṃ rūpaṃ sabhāvo etesanti paṭivānarūpā. Tenāha ‘‘nivattanasabhāvā’’ti. Kathanaṃ atthassa ācikkhanaṃ. Pavedanaṃ tassa hetudāharaṇāni āharitvā bodhanaṃ. Na upasamāya saṃvattatīti anupasamasaṃvattanaṃ, tadeva anupasamasaṃvattanikaṃ, tasmiṃ. Samussitaṃ hutvā patiṭṭhāhetubhāvato thūpaṃ patiṭṭhāti āha – ‘‘bhinnathūpeti bhinnapatiṭṭhe’’ti. Thūpoti vā dhammassa niyyānabhāvo veditabbo, aññadhamme abhibhuyya samussitaṭṭhena. So nigaṇṭhassa samaye kehici abhinnasammatopi bhinno vinaṭṭhoyeva sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvatoti bhinnathūpo. So eva niyyānabhāvo vaṭṭadukkhato muccitukāmānaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ, taṃ ettha natthīti appaṭisaraṇo, tasmiṃ bhinnathūpe appaṭisaraṇeti evamettha attho veditabbo.
“以老师为标准”,意思是成为像老师的握拳那样、可以作为衡量依据的东西。“以种种方式”,就是以种种形态。说了“没有生起争论”之后,为了说明它没有生起的原因,又说了“因为导师……作不争论之因后才般涅槃”,接着为了阐明这一点,才说“由于世尊”等等。所依和所靠,就是在“这是法、这是律、这是导师之教”这样的判定中的四大教法以及解答问题;因为依靠这些、凭靠这些,持法和持律的人才能作出判定。正如依据经的四大教法,在律中有人问到的义理,依靠四种解答方式就能得到妥善判定,因此法和律在这里能够执行导师的职能,所以他说“因此”等等。因此,这就是这部殊胜开示所要表达的意思:它是堪受这殊胜开示的容器。巴利
Ācariyappamāṇanti ācariyamuṭṭhi hutvā pamāṇabhūtaṃ. Nānānīhārenāti nānākārena. ‘‘Vivādo na uppajjī’’ti vatvā tassa anuppattikāraṇaṃ dassento, ‘‘satthā hi…pe… avivādakāraṇaṃ katvāva parinibbāyī’’ti vatvā taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Patiṭṭhā ca avassayo ca, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo ayaṃ vinayo idaṃ satthusāsana’’nti vinicchayane mahāpadesā, pañhabyākaraṇāni ca, yasmā tesu patiṭṭhāya te avassāya dhammavinayadharā ca nicchayaṃ gacchanti. Tathā hi suttantamahāpadesato vinaye kenaci pucchito attho catunnaṃ pañhabyākaraṇānaṃ vasena suvinicchitarūpo, tasmā dhammavinayo idha satthu kiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkotīti āha – ‘‘tenevā’’tiādi, tasmā uḷārāya desanāya bhājananti adhippāyo.
42 由于“带来”是进入对立之后才拿来,且应当使之成为真实,所以称“带来”为根本,因此说“论之带来”,意思是法论的根本原因。由谁之力而争论生起,那些人本身就是说不法的人;愿那争论先给他们带来不利和痛苦,然后才是对其他天、人的谈论。这是以指责相续成为杂染事来作回应。因此他说“如《憍赏弥犍度》中所说”等。巴利
42. Paṭipaviṭṭhaṃ katvā āharitabbato, saccaṃ kāritabbato pābhataṃ mūlanti āha – ‘‘kathāpābhata’’nti, dhammakathāya mūlakāraṇanti attho. Yesaṃ vasena vivādo uppanno, teyeva adhammavādino, tesaṃ tāva so ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattatu, tato aññesaṃ devamanussānaṃ kathanti, codanā paramparāya saṃkilesavatthubhāvatoti parihāro. Tenāha – ‘‘kosambakakkhandhake viyā’’tiādi.
43 43. “由神通而说”:以殊胜的智慧了知之后而令觉悟。“以依止之相”:不指定地依止,以尊重的方式而具有依止的性质。因此说“依止而住”,意思是以更重要的所依而住。“在《附随》中所制定”:即“为了活命、以活命为因”,这样确定之后,以不混杂的方式安置在《附随》的经文中。“诸比丘,你们应当如此诵此学处”——这确实正是依据《分别》的经文,由世尊所制定。除了这些以外,其余所有的学处称为“增上巴帝摩卡”,这应当以牛与牛的比喻来理解,因为它们也具有增上巴帝摩卡的性质。巴利
43.Abhiññā desitāti abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya jānitvā bodhitā. Patissayamānarūpāti apadissa patissayamānā garukavasena nissayamānasabhāvā. Tenāha – ‘‘upanissāya viharantī’’ti, garutaraṃ nissayaṃ katvā viharantīti attho. Parivāre paññattānīti, ‘‘ājīvahetu ājīvakāraṇā’’ti, evaṃ niddhāretvā parivārapāḷiyaṃ (pari. 336) āsaṅkaravasena ṭhapitāni. ‘‘Evañca pana, bhikkhave, imaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ uddiseyyā’’ti (pārā. 39, 42, 43) vibhaṅgapāṭhavaseneva hi tāni bhagavatā paññattāni. Tāni ṭhapetvā sesāni sabbasikkhāpadāni adhipātimokkhaṃ nāmāti, idaṃ gobalībaddañāyena vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ tesampi adhipātimokkhabhāvato.
这里,“这是方法”的意思是:下文所要说明的,正是针对极易断除、微不足道的情形而言。“那些”指的是那些殊胜的食物。“无论任何人”指的是任何比丘或比丘尼。“恶作罪的事缘”指的是任何属于恶作罪事缘的情况。“由此”的意思是:因为极易断除,所以根本罪的违犯极其微细。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ nayoti tasmiṃ suppajahanāya appamattakabhāve ayaṃ vakkhamāno. Tānīti paṇītabhojanāni. Yo kocīti bhikkhu vā bhikkhunī vā. Dukkaṭavatthukanti yaṃ kiñci dukkaṭāpattivatthukaṃ. Tenāti suppajahanabhāvena mūlāpattivītikkamassa aṇumattatāya.
“前分道”指的是世间道。“在那里”指的是在依靠前分道而引发争论的那个地方。“光明智”指的是作为光明生起之因的智。而在那里,因为他怀着“这是道”的想法,又听闻过道有四种,所以说了“名为初道”等话。“如是”的意思是:这样一来,他就无法毫无迷惑、毫无疑虑、毫无执著地讲述业处。巴利
Pubbabhāgamagganti lokiyamaggaṃ. Tatrāti tasmiṃ pubbabhāgamaggaṃ nissāya vivāduppāde. Obhāsañāṇanti obhāsassa uppattihetubhūtaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Tattha pana so maggasaññibhāvena maggo ca catubbidhoti sutattā, ‘‘paṭṭhamamaggo nāmā’’tiādimāha. Evanti evaṃ asandiddhaṃ aparisaṅkitaṃ pariccattaṃ katvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetuṃ na sakkoti.
他说没有塔,因为没有见过为他所建的那座塔。把应受谴责的凡夫状态抬高成应受称赞的圣者状态,执取并高举这种邪见来宣说,因此天界和圣道都被遮止了。对此曾这样说:巴利
Cetiyaṃ na diṭṭhanti tassa kataṃ thūpaṃ vadati. Nindiye puthujjanabhāve ṭhitaṃ pāsaṃsaṃ ariyabhāvaṃ āropetvā taṃ micchāladdhiṃ abhinivissa paggayha voharaṇato saggopi maggopi vāritoyevāti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“ 称誉可责者,或责可誉人;
彼以口筛除/拣择灾殃,由彼灾殃不得乐。”巴利
‘‘Yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati, taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyo; Vicināti mukhena so kaliṃ, kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindatī’’ti. (su. ni. 663; saṃ. ni. 1.180-181; a. ni. 4.3; netti. 92);
“我要在刹那间讲说能证得阿拉汉果的业处之论”——单凭这句话,就能看出他在这里也有欺诳;至于在其他地方,根本不必多说。Uppāṭetvā 的意思是“拔出来之后”。“那时,那些比丘”等是剩下的部分。他们错误地执取“受用不死的人,就是受用身至念的人”(《增支部》1.600)这句话,然后说:“仅凭这一点,你们就可以说是已经受用不死了。”巴利
‘‘Khaṇeneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samatthakammaṭṭhānakathaṃ ācikkhissāmī’’ti hi iminā tattha kohaññampi dissati; itaresu pana vattabbameva natthi. Uppāṭetvāti uddharitvā. ‘‘Atha te bhikkhū’’tiādi sesaṃ nāma. ‘‘Amataṃ te paribhuñjanti, ye kāyagatāsatiṃ paribhuñjantī’’ti (a. ni. 1.600) vacanaṃ duggahitaṃ gaṇhāpetvā, ‘‘ettāvatā vo amataṃ paribhuttaṃ nāma bhavissatī’’ti āha.
44 Evam只是表示一种行相的特征,并不是对行相的限定。这句话的意思是:正是由于这个原因,争论才可能产生。对值得尊重的人生起的尊重之心,因为以值得尊重者为所缘、与尊重相应,所以称为尊重;那种状态就是恭敬,恭敬的行为就是敬重,而这里没有这些,所以是不恭敬。因此说“缺少恭敬”。以恭敬之心对值得尊重者表示谦下,称为谦恭,也就是态度卑下;与此相反就是不谦恭,所以说“不敬奉、不卑下”。在这里,为了说明这个人怎样对导师不恭敬,才说了“然而此处”等话。其中,“于三时不去侍奉”等,是总括无余显示一切;若从各部分来说,不恭敬的成立,就像一般地受持学处,而它的差别则在于破坏。这个道理对其余各项也同样适用。巴利
44.Evanti ākāralakkhaṇametaṃ, na ākāraniyamanaṃ. Tena imināva kāraṇena ca yo vivādo uppajjeyyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Garusmiṃ garūti pavattaṃ cittaṃ garuvisayattā taṃsahacaritattā garu, tassa bhāvo gāravaṃ, garukaraṇaṃ, taṃ ettha natthīti agāravo. Tenāha ‘‘gāravavirahito’’ti. Garussa gāravavasena patissayanaṃ patissoti vuccati nīcavuttitā, tappaṭipakkhato appatissoti āha – ‘‘appatissayo anīcavuttī’’ti. Ettha yathāyaṃ puggalo satthari agāravo nāma hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘ettha panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tīsukālesu upaṭṭhānaṃ na yātītiādi samudāyakittanaanavasesadassanaṃ, avayavato pana agāravasiddhi yathā taṃ sāmaññato sikkhāpadasamādānaṃ tabbiseso bhedo. Esa nayo sesesupi.
不恭敬地前往,意思是:并非出于恭敬而前往。他所做的,因为归属于僧团,就等于是在僧团中做的。就像为僧团而布施的东西,由一位比丘接受下来,就等于已经布施给僧团了。学处未圆满修学者,就是对学处不恭敬。所以世尊说:“对学处不圆满修学者。”(《中部》2.135)自己这一方生起的争论根源,特别应当由自己来平息,而且只会给自己带来不利,所以特别称为“内”。对外也是同样的道理。巴利
Sakkaccaṃ na gacchatīti ādaravasena na gacchati. Saṅghe katoyeva hoti saṅghapariyāpannattā tassa, yathā saṅghaṃ uddissa dinnaṃ ekena bhikkhunā paṭiggahitaṃ saṅghassa dinnameva hoti. Aparipūrayamānova sikkhāya agāravo. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘sikkhāya na paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.135). Attano parisāya uppannaṃ vivādamūlaṃ visesato attanā vūpasametabbato attano ca anatthāvahato ‘‘ajjhatta’’ntveva vuttaṃ. Esa nayo bahiddhāti etthāpi.
46 六种分析即六种根本。就像诸止息法凭借止息的作用,在诤论等当中占据主导地位一样,诤论等也因为这些止息法而成为主导的对象。所以说“为了平息……诸诤事”。这就说明了“诤事”一词含有“所作业”的意思。或者,因为是依止息的作用而在这些事上被止息,所以称为诤事,也就是诤论等。巴利
46.Chaṭhānānīti chamūlāni. Yathā samanavasena samathānaṃ vivādādīsu adhikattubhāvo, evaṃ vivādādīnaṃ tehi adhikattabbatāpīti āha – ‘‘vūpasamanatthāya…pe… adhikaraṇānī’’ti. Tena adhikaraṇasaddassa kammatthataṃ āha. Samathā vā samanavasena adhikarīyanti etthāti adhikaraṇāni, vivādādayo.
诤论刚一产生,就会随着后来变得粗重。它依某个事由而最初生起,顺着这个诤论,就像跟着根本疾病而来的并发症一样,以那件事或另一件事为依托而不断增长,到了争论诤事的地步,就继续向上扩展;到了非难诤事、罪过诤事、义务诤事的地步,诤论的增长就更加明显了。因此说:“达到四种诤事,这个诤论就向上增长。”“已生起的又生起”:就是不断冒出来的。“为了平息”:就是为了达到平息。巴利
Vivādo uppannamattova hutvā parato kakkhaḷatthāya saṃvattanato yaṃ vatthuṃ nissāya paṭhamaṃ uppanno vivādānusārena mūlakaṃ viya anubandharogo tameva tadaññaṃ vā vatthuṃ katvā pavaḍḍhanto vivādādhikaraṇaṃ patvā upari vaḍḍhati nāma, anuvādāpattikiccādhikaraṇaṃ patvā vivādassa ca vaḍḍhanaṃ pākaṭameva. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘cattāri adhikaraṇāni patvā upari vaḍḍhanto so vivādo’’ti. Uppannānaṃ uppannānanti (dī. ni. ṭī. 3.331) uṭṭhitānaṃ uṭṭhitānaṃ. Samathatthanti samanatthaṃ.
“以十八事”:这是说明特征的表述,就像“如果我的病发作,就应当给这个药”一样。所以,当人们以其中任何一事进行争论时,就说他们“以十八事争论”。“诽谤”:就是辱骂。“举罪”:就是追问追究。巴利
Aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhīti lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ yathā ‘‘yadi me byādhī dāheyyuṃ. Dātabbamidamosadha’’nti (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 2.3.39-42; kaṅkhā. abhi. ṭī. adhikaraṇasamathavaṇṇanā), tasmā tesu aññatarena vivadantā, ‘‘aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi vivadantī’’ti vuccanti. Upavadanāti akkoso. Codanāti anuyogo.
诤事唯在现前而得到调伏,所以叫“现前毗尼”。在僧团集会时,因为如法说的人占多数而举行裁决甘马,这就是“多数决”。这是指执行甘马的僧团以和合的方式现前,而不是说执行者个人随随便便在场就算数。“真实性”就是真实不虚。这里“法”这个词是“真实”的意思,就像在“如法说的人”等说法中的用法一样。依此来调伏,所以叫“律”,这是世尊为了平息各种诤事而制定的规则,这个律的现前就是“律现前”。就“诤论事”这个意义来说,那些敌对的人就是“义敌对者”,即针对这些义敌对者而言。因为只靠被推选的个别人来平息,僧团的现前性就缺失了。巴利
Adhikaraṇassa sammukhāva vinayanato sammukhāvinayo. Sannipatitaparisāya dhammavādīnaṃ yebhuyyatāya yebhuyyasikakammassa karaṇaṃ yebhuyyasikā. Kārakasaṅghassa sāmaggivasena sammukhībhāvo, na yathā tathā kārakapuggalānaṃ sammukhatāmattaṃ. Bhūtatāti tacchatā. Saccapariyāyo hi idha dhamma-saddo ‘‘dhammavādī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.9) viya. Vineti etenāti vinayo, tassa tassa adhikaraṇassa vūpasamāya bhagavatā vuttavidhi, tassa vinayassa sammukhatā vinayasammukhatā. Vivādavatthusaṅkhāte atthe paccatthikā atthapaccatthikā, tesaṃ atthapaccatthikānaṃ. Saṅghasammukhatā parihāyati sammatapuggaleheva vūpasamanato.
“那”是指在诤论诉讼中。也就是像“不因贪欲而行非道”等经文里所说的,具足五支的集会。在秘密投票等方式中,如果无惭愧者占多数的集会,应当行秘密筹;如果惭愧者占多数,就应当公开;如果愚痴者占多数,就应当行耳语筹。哪种做法能让如法说者成为多数,那就是多数决,所以说“以如法说者占多数……”等等。巴利
Nanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na chandāgatiṃ gacchatī’’tiādinā (pari. 383) vuttaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ. Guḷhakādīsu alajjussannāya parisāya guḷhako salākaggāho kātabbo; lajjussannāya vivaṭako, bālussannāya sakaṇṇajappako. Yassā kiriyāya dhammavādino bahutarā, sā yebhuyyasikāti āha – ‘‘dhammavādīnaṃ yebhuyyatāyā’’tiādi.
像这样判决:先指出犯戒,再按确定的方式作出判决;至于出罪,后面讲到犯戒诤事的止息时还会再说到。对那个人来说,这不是沙门所相应的,不是沙门该做的。违犯,就是越轨、犯戒。覆藏者,就是替人隐瞒的人。因为恶行充斥,所以称他为恶人,对他该做的甘马就是觅罪相毗尼。巴利
Evaṃ vinicchitanti āpattiṃ dassetvā ropanavasena vinicchitaṃ, paṭikammaṃ pana āpattādhikaraṇasamathe parato āgamissati. Na samaṇasāruppaṃ assāmaṇakaṃ, samaṇehi akātabbaṃ, tasmiṃ. Ajjhācāre vītikkamesati. Paṭicaratoti paṭicchādentassa. Pāpussannatāya pāpiyo, puggalo, tassa kātabbakammaṃ tassapāpiyasikaṃ.
即使有现前毗尼,如果没有自言毗尼,或者没有某种忍认,也无法平息。这里的“此处”,是指发露犯戒。对于已经自言毗尼的犯戒状态等,所应做的行为是:“未来应当防护”,以及通过给予别住等方式而进行的语业,这就是“自言毗尼毗尼”。巴利
Sammukhāvinayeneva vūpasamo natthi paṭiññāya, tathārūpāya khantiyā vā vinā avūpasamanato . Etthāti āpattidesanāyaṃ. Paṭiññāte āpannabhāvādike karaṇakiriyā, ‘‘āyatiṃ saṃvareyyāsī’’ti, parivāsadānādivasena ca pavattaṃ vacīkammaṃ paṭiññātakaraṇaṃ.
“随顺适宜”是指按照“以二、以四、以三、以一”这样所说的方式,随顺而适宜。“此处”是指在这部经中,或者是在这个止息诤论的审察中。“判决理趣”是指判决方面的理趣。因此他说“然而广说……”等等。巴利
Yathānurūpanti ‘‘dvīhi catūhi tihi ekenā’’ti evaṃ vuttanayena yathānurūpaṃ. Etthāti imasmiṃ sutte, etasmiṃ vā samathavicāre. Vinicchayanayoti vinicchaye nayamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘vitthāro panā’’tiādi.
47 这只是简略说明,不像《止息犍度》那样详细展开。“如是”一词是把“法”这个词拉过来;这里的“如是”表示开端,或者也可以说“以这样的方式”。因为菩提分法完全无可指责,所以不存在非正法的性质;若把世尊教导的方式删减或增添之后再宣说,那就是没有如法而行,因此成为非正法。为了说明这一点,他说“三个念处”等。巴利
47.Saṅkhepatova vutto, na samathakkhandhake viya vitthārato. Tathāti iminā ‘‘dhammā’’ti padaṃ ākaḍḍhati, ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, evamādinā iminā pakārenāti vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ ekantānavajjabhāvato natthi adhammabhāvo, bhagavato desitākāraṃ hāpetvā vaḍḍhetvā vā kathanaṃ yathādhammaṃ akatanti katvā adhammabhāvoti dassento āha – ‘‘tayo satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādi.
“能导出的”是指它伴随神通、不退转地运行。“正是那样”是用“我们这样”等说法,把前面所说的意思拉过来。以真实……应当做的行为称为“法”,因为是如法而行;与所说的相反,从这以后就是“非法”。这称为“律”,因为它能收摄、断除、审察贪等;这称为“非律”,因为它不能调伏贪等。这称为“律”,是因为依律而行;与所说的相反,另一个就是“非律”。正因为“事成就”等,一切律的行为才不可动摇,所以他说“事成就……这称为律”,从相反的一面就应当知道是“非律”。因此他说“事败坏”等。巴利
Niyyānikanti sapāṭihīraṃ appaṭivānaṃ hutvā pavattati. Tathevāti iminā ‘‘evaṃ amhāka’’ntiādinā vuttamatthaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Bhūtena…pe… kātabbakammaṃ dhammo nāma yathādhammaṃ karaṇato, vuttavipariyāyato ito paraṃ adhammo. Ayaṃ vinayo nāma rāgādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato pahānato paṭisaṅkhānato ca. Ayaṃ avinayo nāma rāgādīnaṃ avinayanato. Ayaṃ vinayo nāma yathāvinayakaraṇato, vuttavipariyāyena itaro avinayo. Vatthusampattiādinā eva sabbesaṃ vinayakammānaṃ akuppatāti āha – ‘‘vatthusampatti…pe… ayaṃ vinayo nāmā’’ti, tappaṭipakkhato avinayo veditabbo. Tenāha ‘‘vatthuvipattī’’tiādi.
以正行引导之义而言,前面所说的法本身就是“引导”;正因如此,它犹如众生身上的绳索,是持续不松缓地运作之因,故说为“法绳”,此即其义。依经教之说法,首先十善业道即被称为法。或者,就让那“法引导”成立吧——在此注释中,把“三十六菩提分法”等由法与律所说的法引来配合,即令其成为“法引导”。它与那法引导相合,与前面所说的法引导相一致,意思是它们就是同一特征。如此,在判定“作为争论基础的此事是法抑或非法,是律抑或非律”时,所显示的只是某些人的争论事,因为平息它的方法尚未完成。巴利
Sammāpaṭipattiyā nayanaṭṭhena yathāvutto dhammo eva netti, tato eva sattassa viya rajju asithilapavattihetutāya dhammarajjūti attho vutto. Suttantapariyāyena tāva dasa kusalakammapathā dhammoti evaṃ vuttā. Sā eva vā hotu dhammanetti, yo idha imissā vaṇṇanāya, ‘‘chattiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā’’tiādinā dhammena ca vinayena ca vutto, so eva vā dhammanetti hotūti ānetvā yojanā. Tāya dhammanettiyā sameti tāya yathāvuttāya dhammanettiyā saṃsandati, ekalakkhaṇameva hotīti attho. Evaṃ vivādavatthubhūto dhammo ce ‘‘dhammo’’ti, adhammo ce ‘‘adhammo’’ti, vinayo ce ‘‘vinayo’’ti, avinayo ce ‘‘avinayo’’ti nicchinantena ekaccānaṃ vivādādhikaraṇameva dassitaṃ tassa vūpasamadhammānaṃ apariyosāpitattā.
48 “然而此”是指诤事,这是就诤事本身而说的。在“回遮”部分,即使依照义注的方式已经获得了意义,也是如此。“以二”的意思是:在某个住处生起了诤事,那里居住的比丘要超过两位。巴利
48.Taṃ panetanti vivādādhikaraṇaṃ paccāmasati. Vāre atthasaṃvaṇṇanāvasena pattepi. Dvīhīti yasmiṃ āvāse vivādādhikaraṇaṃ uppannaṃ, tattha vāsīhi dvīhipi bhikkhūhi atirekatarā.
49 “蕴的近处”是指以犯蕴的状态而邻近。“犯的近处”是指在正式犯戒之前的预备阶段所犯的罪。因为以欲染作身体接触是恶作的所依,所以说“初巴拉基格的前分是恶作”。其余三巴拉基格的前分则只是土喇咤亚。巴利
49.Khandhasāmantanti āpattikkhandhabhāvena samīpaṃ. Āpattisāmantaṃ nāma pubbabhāgā āpajjitabbaāpatti. Methunarāgavasena kāyasaṃsagge dukkaṭassa vatthūti āha – ‘‘paṭhamapārājikassa pubbabhāge dukkaṭa’’nti. Sesānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pārājikānaṃ pubbabhāge thullaccayameva.
50 已经绕行并着手之后,就在这里特别显示出犯戒诤事,因为它应当通过承认来处理,也是所希望的处理方式。巴利
50.Parikkamitvā upakkamitvā. Āpattādhikaraṇaṃ dassitaṃ tattheva visesato paṭiññāya kāretabbatāya icchitabbattā.
52 这里显示的是业的“事”,意思并不是指止。难道这不就是讲止的部分吗?确实如此,不过,一旦说明了止的因,也就等于说明了止。为了表明这一点,才说了“对于这样的……”等话。巴利
52.Kammassa vatthu dassitaṃ na samathoti adhippāyo. Nanu cāyaṃ samathādhikāroti? Saccaṃ, samathassa pana kāraṇe dassite samatho dassitova hotīti dassetuṃ ‘‘evarūpassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
53 这里说的“业”,就是指“我们这些争吵的人……”等所说的那种业。说它像草覆地一样,是因为两者相似,所以借那个名称来称呼它,就像说“这是梵授”一样。草覆地甘马只是一种形式而已,并不是它全部的实行方式。因此说“在犍度中”等等。在家人用“没有芝麻团”之类低劣的话来讥讽、贬损,这属于在法的回应上以欺骗方式犯下的罪。这里的“此的”指的是应作之事。它的平息只能通过现前毗尼来达成,因为是通过僧伽现前等方式而平息的。巴利
53.Idaṃ kammanti ‘‘idaṃ amhākaṃ bhaṇḍanajātāna’’ntiādinā vuttakammaṃ. Tiṇavatthārakasadisattāti taṃsadisatāya tabbohāroti dasseti yathā – ‘‘esa brahmadatto’’ti. Ākāramattameva tiṇavatthārakakammaṃ nāma, na pana tassa sabbaso karaṇavidhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khandhake’’tiādi. Gihīnaṃ hīnena khuṃsanavambhanaṃ yathā ‘‘tilasaṃguḷikā natthī’’ti. Dhammikapaṭissavesu visaṃvādanavasena āpannā āpatti. Assāti kiccādhikaraṇassa. Sammukhāvinayeneva vūpasamo saṅghasammukhatādināva vūpasamanato.
54 在《憍赏弥经》(中部1.492)中,因为说到证入流果,所以讲的是入流道的正见;但在这里,因为只说了“住于见平等性”,所以说“应当知道,在这部经里说的是入流果的正见”。恶业的小和大,应当通过有过失性的轻与重来理解,因此说“小”就是过失少,“粗”就是过失大。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
54. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyavacanato kosambiyasutte (ma. ni. 1.492) sotāpattimaggasammādiṭṭhi kathitā, idha pana ‘‘diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati’’cceva vuttattā, ‘‘imasmiṃ sutte sotāpattiphalasammādiṭṭhi vuttāti veditabbā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pāpakammassa appatā mahantatā sāvajjabhāvassa mudutikkhabhāvena veditabbāti āha ‘‘aṇunti appasāvajjaṃ. Thūlanti mahāsāvajja’’nti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
5. 《苏那卡达经》注释巴利
5. Sunakkhattasuttavaṇṇanā
55 55. 由于以更低层的道所了知的范围之外来了知,所以称为正智,也就是道慧。由于是彼之果,所以称为最上果慧;与它俱生的正思惟等,也被称为正智。所以说“正智就是阿拉汉果”。这是用四句来宣说的,就像“世尊已被我圆满奉事”等那样,并非只用一句。为了表明把“我已证得出世间法”仅仅臆想即是增上慢,所以说了“于未证得而以为证得”等语。巴利
55. Heṭṭhimamaggehi ñātamariyādāya pajānanato aññā, maggapaññā. Tassa phalabhāvato aggaphalapaññā, taṃsahagatā sammāsaṅkappādayo ca ‘‘aññā’’ti vuttāti āha ‘‘aññāti arahatta’’nti. Catūhi padehi kathitā, ‘‘pariciṇṇā me bhagavā’’tiādīsu viya na ekapadeneva. ‘‘Lokuttaro dhammo adhigato mayā’’ti maññanāmattaṃ adhimānoti dassento, ‘‘appatte pattasaññino’’tiādimāha.
56 这个“处”,指的是作为光明等假立之因的、更殊胜的生灭智。因为它更殊胜,所以成为道果慧的缘;又因为它如实而难以了知,就让观修者产生迷惑。因此说“不明显而黑暗”。“这个提问”,指的是这部甚深、与出世间相应的经,也就是他自己想要了解的道理。“受持之后”,是说仅仅以圆满收集经藏的方式去受持。因此说“未理解之后”。“依附而住”,是指轻视烦恼而依附,或者依附于对教法无益、有害的缘。“如此,于彼”,就是按上面所说的方式,以那些人的造作为因,对于以说法方式而现起的那颗心,就会有“变异”,也就是不想说法的状态。那个“彼”是就前面所说的道理而言的。这个“此”,就是指前面所说的“连他也会生起变异”。巴利
56.Idaṃ ṭhānanti idaṃ obhāsādisammutihetubhūtaṃ uḷārataraṃ udayabbayañāṇaṃ. Uḷāratarabhāvena hi taṃ maggaphalapaññāya paccayo hutvā yāthāvato dubbiññeyyatāya vipassakaṃ visaṃvādeti. Tenāha ‘‘avibhūtaṃ andhakāra’’nti. Imaṃ pañhanti imaṃ suttaṃ gambhīraṃ lokuttarapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ attanā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ atthaṃ. Uggahetvāti kevalaṃ piṭakasampādanavaseneva uggaṇhitvā. Tenāha ‘‘ajānitvā’’ti. Visevamānāti kilesavise avamānentā, sāsanassa vā anupakāravirūpapaccaye sevamānā. Evamassāti evaṃ vuttanayena tesaṃ karaṇahetu assa cittassa dhammadesanāvasena pavattassa. Aññathābhāvo adesetukāmatā hoti. Tanti yathāvuttamatthaṃ sandhāya. Etanti ‘‘tassapi hoti aññathatta’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ.
58 烦恼所接触、抓取的东西,就叫“饵食”,也就是属于世间的东西。这里指的是五种欲。虽然五欲也具备轮回饵食的性质,但一旦确认了它们就是欲饵食的性质,所以就说“处于轮回饵食、欲饵食、世间饵食之中”。确实,五欲因为会让轮回增长,所以是“轮回饵食”;因为可以被欲求、被欲贪抓取,所以是“欲饵食”;因为在大多数情况下是有情世间的饵食,所以是“世间饵食”。“与欲相应的”,就是随顺五欲、与五欲相关联。“与不动定相应的”,是指与那些因没有烦恼扰动而在这里称为“不动”的较低层无色定相应。“像这样的人”,就是心倾向于世间饵食之类的缘,趣向于彼、以彼为重、朝向于彼。“到此为止”,就是通过这样说明了有信的人以及他们已生起的心性。“头已经探了出去”,就是像为了求得利益而把头伸到外面一样。“肚子鼓胀起来”,就是因为可得到的东西太多,像往袋子里塞进太多东西一样,肚子变得鼓胀。巴利
58. Kilesehi āmasīyatīti āmisaṃ, lokepariyāpannaṃ āmisanti idha pañca kāmaguṇā adhippetāti tesu vaṭṭāmisabhāvepi labhite kāmāmisabhāvo siddhoti āha – ‘‘vaṭṭāmisakāmāmisalokāmisabhūtesū’’ti. Kāmaguṇā hi vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanato vaṭṭāmisaṃ, kāmetabbato kāmataṇhāya āmasitabbato kāmāmisaṃ, yebhūyyato sattalokassa āmisabhāvato lokāmisaṃ. Kāmaguṇasabhāgāti kāmaguṇānulomā kāmaguṇapaṭisaṃyuttā. Āneñjasamāpattipaṭisaṃyuttāyāti kilesiñjanarahitatāya idha āneñjāti adhippetāhi heṭṭhimāhi arūpasamāpattīhi paṭisaṃyuttāya. Evarūpoti lokāmisabhūtesu paccayesu adhimutto tanninno taggaruko tappabbhāro. Ettāvatāti evaṃ saddhānaṃ manussānaṃ dassanena tesaṃ pavattitāsayena ca. Sīsaṃ nikkhantaṃ hotīti lābhāsāya sīsaṃ bahi nikkhantaṃ viya hoti. Udaraṃ phalitanti atibahubhaṇḍaṃ pakkhipiyamānaṃ pasibbakaṃ viya laddhabbassa atipahūtabhāvena udaraṃ phītaṃ hoti.
59 就像前面两种无色定,因为不被它们各自对立的烦恼所动摇,所以称为“不动”,其余两种也是这样。所谓“已吐出”,就是指已经吐出、舍弃了世间染著的结缚。巴利
59. Yathā purimā dve arūpasamāpattiyo attano paccanīkakilesehi aniñjanato ‘‘aniñjā’’ti vuccanti, evaṃ itarāpi. Taṃ pavuttanti lokāmisasaṃyojanaṃ vigataṃ.
60 “磨”的意思是:限定“它只有这么大”,也就是划出界限。“用胶”是指皮匠用的胶之类的胶;至于像金刚胶那样的粘合,就更不用说了。“那已破碎”是说:不动结已被破碎、摧毁、超越,因为对那些等至已不再有任何期待。由于内心不与之相连,所以说“就像一块石头裂成两半一样”。因此说:“不会生起‘我要入那个定’的心。”巴利
60.Nighaṃsanti ‘‘ettako aya’’nti paricchedanti attho. Silesenāti cammakārasilesādisilesena, vajiralepasilese vattabbameva natthi. Taṃ bhinnanti āneñjasaṃyojanaṃ bhinnaṃ vidhamitaṃ samatikkantaṃ tāsu samāpattīsu apekkhābhāvato. Ajjhāsayena asambaddhattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dvedhābhinnā selā viya hotī’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘taṃ samāpajjissāmīti cittaṃ na uppajjatī’’ti.
61 已吐出,意思是已丢弃、已放开。巴利
61.Vantanti chaḍḍitaṃ, vissaṭṭhanti attho.
62 对于“得上等至者”这句话,这里的“上等至”指的是阿拉汉果的等至。而对于阿拉汉来说,仅凭证得道,不来果等至,也就是属于有学者境界的较低果等至,便已止息。至于世间等至,则是通过断除对它的贪爱而舍弃的,所以说“于下等……心不生起”。巴利
62.Uparisamāpattilābhinoti ettha uparisamāpattīti arahattaphalasamāpatti adhippetā, arahato ca maggādhigameneva anāgāmiphalasamāpatti, sekkhānaṃ visayā heṭṭhimā phalasamāpattiyo paṭippassaddhā. Lokiyā pana nikantippahānena paṭinissaṭṭhāti āha – ‘‘heṭṭhā…pe… na uppajjatī’’ti.
63 “苏那卡达,有这五种欲”等话,是开示的开始;以赞叹“正信向涅槃的人”是阿拉汉作为结束。从那以后,“然而此位”等话,被称为“另一个连结”。因此说“在下等”。其中,既可以像“漏尽者得等至”那样搭配,也可以搭配为“漏尽者中的纯观行者”,但注释书里对此作了否定。为了说明否定的原因,所以说“因为得等至者”等。就像一个生起增上慢的纯观行者,因为“未证得时生起已证得想”,与得等至者同类而没有差别;同样,纯观的漏尽者与得等至的漏尽者,都具漏尽的性质,也没有差别。因此说“说到得等至者时,另一类实际上也已经说到了”。“二比丘”指得等至的增上慢者与漏尽者。因此他说“先于凡夫”等。巴利
63. ‘‘Pañca kho ime, sunakkhatta, kāmaguṇā’’tiādinā āraddhadesanā, ‘‘sammā nibbānādhimutto purisapuggalo’’ti arahattakittanena niṭṭhāpitāti tato paraṃ, ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panā’’tiādikā desanā, ‘‘pāṭiyekko anusandhī’’ti vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘heṭṭhā hī’’tiādi. Tattha yathā khīṇāsavassa samāpattilābhinoti yojanā, evaṃ vā khīṇāsavassa sukkhavipassakassāti yojetabbā. Paṭikkhittaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Tassa paṭikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘samāpattilābhino hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā sukkhavipassako adhimāniko samāpattilābhino samānayogakkhamo appatte pattasaññitāya bhedābhāvato, evaṃ sukkhavipassako khīṇāsavo samānayogakkhamo khīṇāsavabhāvena visesābhāvato, tasmā ‘‘samāpattilābhimhi kathite itaropi kathitova hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dvinnaṃ bhikkhūnanti samāpattilābhino adhimānikassa khīṇāsavassa ca. Tenevāha ‘‘puthujjanassa tāvā’’tiādi.
“从哪一部分”就是指从哪个部分。即使对漏尽者来说,不合适的所缘也不会成为烦恼生起的条件,因为那些烦恼已经被彻底断除了。但它仍可能成为安住于寂静的障碍,因为它是不同类、不相称的,所以说“对漏尽者也是不合适的”。因此说“名为毒……实为毒”。这是为了显示:“就像对毒的认识不可限量,但由于它能引起变异,所以仍应回避;同样,即使已经遍知,也因为不再有特殊意义,它仍然是一样的,所以仍应回避。”因此说“不”等。确实,不应成为不防护者,因为那极不适当。只有在与己相合的所缘——如光明等——中善加运用,才是恰当的。巴利
Yadaggenāti yena bhāgena. Yadipi khīṇāsavassa asappāyārammaṇaṃ kilesānaṃ uppattiyā paccayo na hoti tesaṃ sabbaso samucchinnattā. Santavihāraparipantho pana siyā visabhāgatoti vuttaṃ – ‘‘khīṇāsavassapi asappāyamevā’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘visaṃ nāma…pe… visamevā’’ti. Etena ‘‘yathā visajānanaṃ appamāṇaṃ, vikāruppādanato pana taṃ pariharitabbaṃ, evaṃ pariññātampi vattu atthavisesābhāvena ekarūpamevāti taṃ pariharitabbamevā’’ti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Na hi asaṃvutena bhavitabbaṃ asāruppabhāvato. Yuttapayuttenevāti sabhāgārammaṇassa ālokanādīsu yutteneva bhavituṃ vaṭṭati.
64 64. 它自己落生、生起的地方,因为那相续清净而变坏,又因为它是被称为毒的苦之根本,所以说为“由无明而成的毒患”。所谓“变坏”:通过生起应作等迷执而造成变异。所谓“令破坏”:就是障碍。贪一旦生起,就不给善心生起留出空间,因此障碍它;这样的贪由于吐出净信的润泽以及止与观的增长,就使它干枯、凋萎。因此说“令干枯、令凋萎”。“含毒之余”:意思是所执取的毒还留有剩余。“不堪、不能”:就是没有能力。巴利文本中说的“suka”一词是“sūka(芒刺)”的同义词,所以说“稻谷等的芒刺也叫sūka”。巴利
64. Yattha sayaṃ nipatati uppajjati, tassa santānassa vippasannavasena ruppanato, visasaṅkhātassa dukkhassa mūlabhāvato ca ‘‘avijjāsaṅkhāto visadoso’’ti vuttaṃ. Ruppatīti kattabbādimucchāpādanena vikāraṃ uppādeti. Anuddhaṃseyyāti vibādheyya. Rāgo hi uppajjamānova kusalacittappavattiyā okāsaṃ adento taṃ vibādhati; tathābhūto saddhāsinehassa samathavipassanābhivuḍḍhiyā vamanena ca taṃ visoseti milāpeti. Tenāha ‘‘soseyya milāpeyyā’’ti. Sagahaṇasesanti gahetabbavisaṃ sāvasesaṃ katvāti attho. Na alaṃ na samatthanti analaṃ. Sūkapariyāyo pāḷiyaṃ vutto suka-saddoti āha – ‘‘vīhisukādi ca sūka’’nti.
应当这样理解:还没有断除的无明之毒,就像箭还没有完全拔出来一样,因为它会带来巨大的祸患。不合宜……不防护的时期,应当看作未守护自身之故。就像死亡一样,舍弃学处而退回到低劣状态,是因为被称为增上戒的寿命已经失去了。犯下过失就像临终的痛苦一样,因为它压迫着前面所说的寿命。按照同样的道理来对应譬喻:在这里,已经断除的无明之毒,就像箭已经完全拔出;合宜……善加防护的时期,以及由这两者未使疮口恶化成种种时,就像没有死亡;不舍弃学处,就像没有死亡;不犯任何染污的过失,就像没有临终的痛苦——应当这样理解其中的关联。巴利
Saupādānasalluddhāroviya appahīno avijjāvisadoso daṭṭhabbo mahānatthuppādanato. Asappāya…pe… asaṃvutakālo daṭṭhabbo attabhāvassa apariharaṇabhāvato. Maraṇaṃ viya sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattanaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātassa āyuno apetattā. Maraṇamattaṃ dukkhaṃ viya āpattiyā āpajjanaṃ yathāvuttassa āyuno upapīḷanakabhāvato. Imināva nayena opammasaṃsandananti ettha anupādisesasalluddhāro viya pahīno avijjāvisadoso; sappāya…pe… susaṃvutakālo, tadubhayena vaṇe puthuttaṃ na gate maraṇābhāvo viya sikkhāya apaccakkhānaṃ, maraṇamattadukkhābhāvo viya aññatarāya saṃkiliṭṭhāya āpattiyā anāpajjananti yojanā veditabbā.
65 关于“念(satiyā)”这个词,这里因为并没有用“圣的”来限定它,所以说“以慧为归宿的念”等等。而且这里指的是世间慧,不是出世间慧,因此说“以清净的观慧”。巴利
65.Satiyāti ettha yasmā ‘‘ariyāyā’’ti na visesitanti āha – ‘‘sati paññāgatikā’’tiādi. Paññā cettha lokiyā adhippetā, na lokuttarāti āha – ‘‘parisuddhāya vipassanāpaññāyā’’ti.
在说明漏尽者之力时说到:即使面对极为殊胜、类似天界那样的所缘,也能让以意为第六的诸根不去攀附,这就是被称为“善防护而行”的漏尽者之力,所以说“防护而行”。因为他的念已经达到最高、最广大的状态,就像没有防护的人的根门就是不防护一样,他靠念和正知的力量守护眼等根门,然后去做看等事情。这样了知之后,就是以和观慧相应的道慧,了知“所依是苦的根本”。苦依靠这些东西而存在,所以叫“所依”,也就是烦恼,因此说“由于断除烦恼之依,成为无依”。正因为如此,苦依靠这些东西而被执取,所以烦恼也称为“取”,因此说“无取之义”。诸依完全灭尽,因此是依之灭尽,即涅槃,因此说“在诸依灭尽而成的涅槃中”。关于所缘,是以之为所缘之后,依该所缘的果解脱而解脱。所谓“他会不会把身移向欲依”,就是“我将会享用诸欲”,在那里把身移近;把身移近暂且不论,他是否会生起那样的心呢?这种原因是不存在的。其余内容容易理解。巴利
Khīṇāsavassa balanti uḷāratamesu dibbasadisesupi ārammaṇesu manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ anupanamanahetubhūtaṃ susaṃvutakārisaṅkhātaṃ khīṇāsavabalaṃ dassento, ‘‘saṃvutakārī’’ti vuttaṃ, ukkaṃsagatasativepullattā yathā asaṃvarassa asaṃvaro hoti, evaṃ satisampajaññabalena cakkhādidvārāni saṃvaritvā dassanādikiccakārī. Evaṃ jānitvāti ‘‘upadhi dukkhassa mūla’’nti evaṃ vipassanāpaññāsahitāya maggapaññāya jānitvā. Upadhīyati dukkhaṃ etehīti upadhī, kilesāti āha – ‘‘kilesupadhipahānā nirupadhī’’ti. Tato eva upādīyati dukkhaṃ etehīti kilesā ‘‘upādānā’’tipi vuccantīti āha – ‘‘nirupādānoti attho’’ti. Upadhī sammadeva khīyanti ettāti upadhisaṅkhayo, nibbānanti āha – ‘‘upadhīnaṃ saṅkhayabhūte nibbāne’’ti. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇaṃ katvā tadārammaṇāya phalavimuttiyā vimutto. Kāmupadhismiṃ kāyaṃ upasaṃharissatīti ‘‘kāmesevissāmī’’ti tattha kāyaṃ upanāmessati; kāyūpasaṃhāro tāva tiṭṭhatu, tathā cittaṃ vā uppādessatīti etaṃ kāraṇaṃ natthīti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
《不动适宜经》的注释巴利
6. Āneñjasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
66 66. 因为具有刹那坏灭的性质,所以它不恒常、不稳固,这就是“无常”。正因如此,智者不应对它生起欲求、不应去接近它,所以也叫“无常”。为了说明这种无常的含义应当通过生起与坏灭的界限来了知,所以说“以存在之后归于不存在的意义,称为无常”;意思就是生起之后便灭去。而这种无常性,以及下面将要说的空虚无实等性质,是两种欲所共有的,所以说“无论是事物欲还是烦恼欲”。它们是空虚的、孤立的,因为恒常、坚实等本质在它们自身中并不存在,所以它们与那些本质相分离。然而,并不像完全没有任何自性的虚空那样被称为“空虚、空无”,它们不是那样。为了说明它们仅仅是因为缺少恒常、坚实等本质才成为空虚、空无,所以说“然而并非……”等。至于“因为并不存在所谓空拳的东西”这一句,是依照世间的通称来说的;世间的通称和世间的说法是不能违背的。巴利
66. Khaṇapabhaṅgutāya na niccā na dhuvāti aniccā. Tato eva paṇḍitehi na iccā na upagantabbātipi aniccā. So cāyaṃ aniccattho udayavayaparicchinnatāya veditabboti dassento, ‘‘hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā’’ti āha; uppajjitvā vinassanatoti attho. Ayañca aniccatā vakkhamānā ca tucchāditā dvinnampi kāmānaṃ sādhāraṇoti āha – ‘‘vatthukāmāpi kilesakāmāpī’’ti. Rittā vivittā, tesaṃ niccasārādīnaṃ attani abhāvato tehi visuṃbhūtā. Yathā pana sabbaso sabhāvarahitamākāsaṃ ‘‘tucchaṃ ritta’’nti vuccati, na evamete. Ete pana kevalaṃ niccasārādivirahato eva tucchā rittāti dassento ‘‘na panā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Na hi tucchamuṭṭhi nāma natthī’’ti idaṃ lokasamaññāvasena vuttaṃ, lokasamaññā lokiyakathā na laṅghitabbā.
“虚妄”这个词,是因为它出现的时间极短、不明显,所以才说“虚妄就是消失的东西”。或者也可以说,它以欺骗为本质,所以叫虚妄。因为这些东西本身虽然是不净等性质,却以清净等样子出现在愚人面前,由于清净等的执取成为现前,所以欺骗了众生。所谓“有消失的本性”,是因为它刹那坏灭,虽然由于短暂出现而好像能被看见,但实际上是变坏之后就不再被认出的那种状态。因此说“如同田野”等等。这里“法”这个词,如同在“有生法者”等处的用法一样,是“本性”的同义词;同样,“自性”这个词也应当这样理解。“虚妄法”,是指具有欺诳本性、有偷取善财的自性,这就是它的意思。“幻所作”,是指由幻术制造,显现为水、宝珠等形相,由幻术等所呈现的东西;如同幻所作,因为变成他性而以不如实相现起,所以是幻所作。因此说“犹如”等等。仅在眼界之内作幻术,不在那之后,所以说“站在见的附近才那样被了知”。这是就商婆罗幻术而言的。巴利
Musāti ittarapaccupaṭṭhānatāya na dissatīti āha ‘‘musāti nāsanakā’’ti. Visaṃvādanaṭṭhena vā musā. Ete hi asubhādisabhāvāpi bālānaṃ subhādibhāvena upaṭṭhahantā subhādiggahaṇassa paccakkhabhāvena satte visaṃvādenti. Nassanasabhāvāti khaṇabhaṅgattā ittarapaccupaṭṭhānatāya dissamānā viyapi hutvā apaññāyanakapakatikā. Tenāha ‘‘khettaṃ viyā’’tiādi. Dhammasaddo cettha ‘‘jātidhammāna’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.398) viya pakatipariyāyo, tathā sabhāvasaddo cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mosadhammāti mosanapakatikā, kusalabhaṇḍaharaṇasabhāvāti attho. Māyākatanti māyāya kataṃ udakādimaṇiādiākārena māyādinā upaṭṭhāpitaṃ; māyākataṃ viya māyākataṃ aññasabhāvā hutvā atathā upaṭṭhahanato. Tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. Cakkhupathe eva katavijjāya, na tato paranti vuttaṃ – ‘‘dassanūpacāre ṭhitasseva tathā paññāyatī’’ti. Tayidaṃ sambaravijjāvasena vuttaṃ.
像这样,先用暂时存在的性质说明诸欲是幻化而成的,现在为了再从别的角度说明,所以说了“又如……”等话。对于本性是无常等的诸欲,却看成是常等,这应当理解为与颠倒相应。说“对愚者的诱骗”,是因为对尚未遍知事理的盲愚之人来说,这是颠倒的原因。由于世尊是站在人间、或者针对人间众生而说的,所以说“现法诸欲”,也就是人间的五种欲乐对象。正因如此,又说“来世诸欲,是指除了那些以外的其余诸欲”。其中,现法欲是指具有可现见自性、成为这些欲之所缘的欲,故称现法欲。对于来世诸欲生起的想,是来世想。它们聚集而存留于此,即指令、命令所行之处,称为“dheyya”(领域)。魔的领域即魔域,因为那是他的自在所行之处。因此说“凡以……”等话。“取”是指以境界与境界者的方式而取,以所缘的方式和以作所缘的方式而取,这是意思。其中,以作所缘的方式取,是指“这是我的”这样不分别地执取;以所缘的方式取,则是分别地感受所缘,他们这样说。然而,对于两者都以渴爱与贪的方式取,针对此而说“这两者都是取”。魔是指烦恼魔。凡烦恼魔所及之处,天子魔也同样使他们随自己的意愿转。所谓针对此而说,是指通过法门来把握人。巴利
Evaṃ tāvakālikabhāvena kāmānaṃ māyākatabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni tato aññenapi pakārena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aniccādisabhāvānaṃ kāmānaṃ niccādisabhāvadassanaṃ vipallāsasahagatatāya veditabbaṃ. Bālānaṃ lāpanatoti apariññātavatthukānaṃ andhabālānaṃ puggalānaṃ vipallāsahetuto. Manussaloke ṭhatvā manussānaṃ vā vasena bhagavatā bhāsitattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikā kāmāti mānusakā pañca kāmaguṇā’’ti . Tato eva ca ‘‘samparāyikāti te ṭhapetvā avasesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha diṭṭhadhammā paccakkhasabhāvā ārammaṇabhūtā etāsaṃ atthīti diṭṭhadhammikā. Samparāyike kāme ārabbha uppannasaññā samparāyikā. Te samecca dhīyati ettha āṇāti dheyyaṃ, āṇāpavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Mārassa dheyyanti māradheyyaṃ tassa issariyapavattanattā. Tenāha ‘‘yehī’’tiādi. Gahitanti visayavisayībhāvena gahitaṃ, ārammaṇavasena ārammaṇakaraṇavasena ca gahitanti attho. Tattha ārammaṇakaraṇavasena gahaṇaṃ nāma ‘‘idaṃ mayha’’nti avibhāgena pariggahakaraṇaṃ; ārammaṇavasena pana gahaṇaṃ bhāgaso ārammaṇānubhavananti vadanti. Ubhayassapi pana taṇhārāgavasena gahaṇaṃ sandhāya, ‘‘ubhayametaṃ gahita’’nti vuttaṃ. Māroti kilesamāro. Yadaggena kilesamāro, tadaggena devaputtamāropi te attano vasaṃ vatteti. Taṃ sandhāyāti dhammamukhena puggalaggahaṇaṃ sandhāya.
未断除颠倒的人因为贪著欲乐,就成了魔罗施展统治权的地方,所以被称为“魔域”。同样,从魔罗的诱饵和活动范围这两个同义角度,他们也被这样称呼。为了说明这一点,论师说“如说鹑鸟……”等。所谓“他撒下”,就是诱饵;那诱饵本身就是种子,所以叫“诱饵种子”。“他们”指五种欲乐。“于其处”,就是在某个地方。巴利
Appahīnavipallāsā hi puggalā kāmādhimuttā mārassa issariyavattanaṭṭhānatāya ‘‘māradheyya’’nti vuttā, tathā mārassa nivāpagocarapariyāyehipi te evaṃ vuttāti dassento, ‘‘yathā coḷassā’’tiādimāha. Nivapatīti nivāpo, so eva bījanti nivāpabījaṃ. Teti kāmaguṇā. Yatthāti yasmiṃ padese.
“属于意的”就是“意所生的”,所以他说“心所生的”。而那些无明等法,在经典里都提到过。为了说明:就像以血液为依托的脓一样,随顺是以所贪爱的对象为依托,违逆是以所嗔恨的对象为依托,因此他说“在所执为我所的事物上”等。“这些(法)在此处”:这里的“idha”只是个虚词,就像“在此,比丘们,我吃了饭”等句中的用法一样。“欲界”:指被称为五种欲乐的行世间;或者说,在世间中具有五种欲乐的世间。“以心决意”:以修习之心,生起禅那所缘的似相。“小”:因为不能镇伏烦恼,所以好像被烦恼从四面八方打碎了一样。通过否定它,就是否定其狭小性。“有量”也是指欲界,因为它只是以镇伏那些使人有量的恶法的方式起作用,并没有真正断除。通过否定它,就是否定其有量性,所以说“无量”是指广大心,他说“色界、无色界”。从彻底断除的角度说,烦恼没有断尽,即使广大的禅那也不算善修习,更何况狭小的禅那呢?所以他说“善修习……这名称只属于出世间”。以这个来说,就是就“善修习”这个词来说的。巴利
Manasi bhavāti mānasāti āha ‘‘cittasambhūtā’’ti. Te pana avijjādayo pāḷiyaṃ āgatā. Evañhi lohitasannissayo pubbo viya anurodhūpanissayo virodhoti dassento, ‘‘mamāyite vatthusmi’’ntiādimāha. Tedhāti ettha idhāti nipātamattaṃ ‘‘idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assa’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) viya. Kāmalokanti kāmaguṇasaṅkhātaṃ saṅkhāralokaṃ, yattha vā loke kāmaguṇavantaṃ lokaṃ. Cittena adhiṭṭhahitvāti jhānārammaṇaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ bhāvanācittena uppādetvā. Parittaṃ nāma vikkhambhanaasamatthattā kilesehi parito khaṇḍitaṃ viya hoti. Tassa paṭikkhepenāti parittabhāvapaṭikkhepena. Pamāṇantipi kāmāvacarameva pāpakānaṃ pamāṇakaraṇadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanavasena appajahanato. Tappaṭikkhepavasena appamāṇaṃ nāma mahaggatanti āha – ‘‘rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacara’’nti. Samucchedavasena kilesānaṃ appahānena mahaggatajjhānampi subhāvitaṃ nāma na hoti, pageva parittajjhānanti āha – ‘‘subhāvitanti…pe… lokuttarassevetaṃ nāma’’nti. Etassa vasenāti ‘‘subhāvita’’nti padassa vasena.
那条行道,就是能带来断除贪欲等的禅那行道。当作为证得阿拉汉果之方法的观,或者作为其方法的第四禅的近行定存在时,心就是清净的,所以说“阿拉汉果……或者……近行定”。所谓胜解清净,是指“今天我就证得阿拉汉果”这样的决意,或者因为心通过近行定而安住,生起“今天我就生起第四禅”这样的决意,这种决意本身就是清净。所谓证得清净,是指证得阿拉汉果或第四禅这种证得本身所带来的清净。因为这种证得能克服烦恼的污浊,带来心极为清净的状态,所以也被称为清净。所谓缘,是指名色的缘,也就是无明等。所谓以一切方式,是指从集起、灭去、味、过患、出离等各个方面。所谓望,是指以胜解为本质的希求。因此说:望安住,得胜解。巴利
Tameva paṭipadanti tameva abhijjhādipahānāvahaṃ jhānapaṭipadaṃ. Arahatte tassa upāyabhūtāya vipassanāya vā catutthajjhāne tassa upāyabhūte upacāre vā sati cittaṃ pasannameva hotīti āha – ‘‘arahattaṃ vā…pe… upacāraṃ vā’’ti. Adhimokkhasampasādoti ‘‘ajjeva arahattaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti vā vipassanāya vīthipaṭipannattā; ‘‘ajjeva catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti vā upacārasamādhinā cittassa samāhitattā adhimuccanabhūto sampasādo. Paṭilābhasampasādoti arahattassa catutthajjhānassa vā adhigamasaṅkhāto sampasādo. Paṭilābhopi hi kilesakālusiyābhibhavanato cittassa suppasannabhāvāvahattā ‘‘sampasādo’’ti vutto. Paccayāti nāmarūpapaccayā avijjādayo. Sabbathāti samudayato atthaṅgamato assādato ādīnavato nissaraṇatoti sabbappakārena. Āsāti adhimuccanavasena āsīsanā. Tenāha – ‘‘āsā santiṭṭhati, adhimokkhaṃ paṭilabhatī’’ti.
“足处”就是立足处、基础。所谓“烦恼平息”,是指与盖相应的烦恼通过镇伏的方式而止息。“念”是指能引生近行禅那的念,它安住下来。“行所摄”是指由于修习达到平衡,择法觉支等诸觉支成为一味而运转,因此含摄在修习心生起中的“行所摄”变得明显、清晰,呈现出来。“心生起”就是修习的心生起。“如泥团附着”是指像粘附在泥团上一样,紧贴着、被放置上去。“以近行而得定”是指通过近行禅那而得定。“此”是指这两种胜解的方式,叫做“胜解清净”。当这种胜解清净存在时——即在观的特相或近行禅那的胜解清净存在时——心就会倾向于进一步决意,所以说“或者证得阿拉汉果……”等。然而,凡是证得阿拉汉果或第四禅的人,他的心本身就是清净的,这从严格意义上说是“证得清净”。即便如此,为了表明这里所取的正是这个意思,所以又说“然而在此”等。“观”等语是对前面所说内容的说明。其中,“以慧”是指以阿拉汉果之慧。“对胜解”是指对信解、对生起精勤。“近行”是指近行禅那。“对不动等至的胜解之因”——这是句子的连接方式。巴利
Pādakanti padaṭṭhānaṃ. Kilesā sannisīdantīti nīvaraṇasahagatā eva kilesā vikkhambhanavasena vūpasamanti. Satīti upacārajjhānāvahā sati santiṭṭhati. Saṅkhāragatanti bhāvanāya samatāya pavattamānattā, ime dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo ekarasā hutvā pavattantīti, bhāvanācittuppādapariyāpannaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ vibhūtaṃ pākaṭaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Cittuppādoti bhāvanācittuppādo. Lepapiṇḍeti silesapiṇḍe laggamāno viya appito viya hoti. Upacārena samādhiyati upacārajjhānena samādhiyati. Ayanti ayaṃ duvidhopi adhimuccanākāro adhimokkhasampasādo nāma. Tasmiṃ sampasāde satīti etasmiṃ vipassanālakkhaṇe, upacārajjhāne vā adhimokkhasampasāde sati. Yo pana arahattaṃ vā paṭilabhati catutthajjhānaṃ vā, tassa cittaṃ vippasannaṃ hotiyeva, ayaṃ nippariyāyato paṭilābhasampasādo, evaṃ santepi idhāmippetameva dassetuṃ , ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vipassanā hītiādi vuttassa samatthanaṃ. Tattha paññāyāti arahattapaññāya. Adhimuccanassāti saddahanaṃ ussukkāpajjanassa. Upacāranti upacārajjhānaṃ. Āneñjasamāpattiyā adhimuccanassa kāraṇanti yojanā.
“现在”是指就在此时。“或不动”是指第四禅。“证入”就是达到。接着用“此即……”等话,把前面简要说的意思展开说明。当最上道的修习存在时,所谓证悟阿拉汉果,从义理上说就已经成立了;为了说明应当只以最上道的慧来决意此事,所以又说“或者”,提出另一种可能。其中,就像为了建殿堂而运来的各种材料和构件如果不齐全,就根本建不成尖顶屋一样,为了说明这个道理,所以说“他无法胜任那件事,就证入不动……”。又或者,以证得较低之道而现观四圣谛,或者证入不动,因为两者都已把握了各自的因。巴利
Etarahi vāti idānimeva. Āneñjaṃ vāti catutthajjhānaṃ vā. Samāpajjatīti adhigacchati. Idaṃ hītiādinā saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarati. Arahattasacchikiriyā nāma aggamaggabhāvanāya sati atthato āpannā hoti, aggamaggapaññā eva tadatthaṃ adhimuccitabbāti dassento, ‘‘atha vā’’ti vikappantaramāha. Tattha yathā nāma pāsādassa atthāya samānītadabbasambhārāvayave appahonte kūṭāgāraṃ kātuṃ na pahontiyeva, evaṃsampadamidanti dassento, ‘‘taṃ anabhisambhuṇanto āneñjaṃ vā samāpajjatī’’ti āha. Catusaccaṃvā sacchikaroti heṭṭhimamaggādhigamanavasena āneñjaṃ vā samāpajjati ubhayassapi hetupariggahitattā.
这里说的是:在那句“或者以慧胜解,或者证入不动”所讲的殊胜证得中,现在要说明的搭配方式是这样的。“如此发生”:就是以现在所说的方式,心发生趣向。“应作之事”:指出家人应做的事。“从那里”:指从证得阿拉汉果来说。“心意退缩”:就是心收缩、怯弱。“不在中途停留”:就是不停在未得定的状态里。现在为了用譬喻说明前面所说的道理,才说了“犹如……”等话。这里的简要意思是:就像那个想抓住野牛的人,一旦退缩,抓兔子、蜥蜴之类的事根本就不用提了;同样,这位比丘本来奋力求证阿拉汉果,若从那里退缩,转而进入第四禅,那也根本不值一提。“道理也是这样”:就是把前面所说的譬喻以及譬喻和所喻的对应,同样套用到道修习的搭配方式和现观四圣谛的搭配方式上。巴利
Tatrāti tasmiṃ ‘‘paññāya vā adhimuccati, āneñjaṃ vā samāpajjatī’’ti yathāvutte visesādhigame ayaṃ idāni vuccamāno yojanānayo. Evaṃ hotīti idāni vuccamānākārena cittābhinīhāro hoti. Kiccanti pabbajitakiccaṃ. Tatoti arahattādhigamanato. Osakkitamānasoti saṃkucitacitto. Antarā na tiṭṭhatīti asamāhitabhūmiyaṃ na tiṭṭhati. Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yathā tassa purisassa vanamahiṃsaṃ gahetuṃ ussāhavato osakkantassa sasagodhādiggahaṇe vattabbameva natthi, evaṃ imassapi bhikkhuno arahattaṃ gahetuṃ ussāhavato tato osakkitvā catutthajjhānasamāpajjane vattabbameva natthīti. Eseva nayoti yathāvuttaṃ upamaṃ upamāsaṃsandanañca maggabhāvanāyojanāyaṃ catusaccasacchikiriyāyojanāyañca atidisati.
显示因义的“yaṃ”是虚词,或者在表示具格时这是主格用法,所以说“以什么因由”。“能引生那个”:它能引生那个,或者那个是它的目的,因此叫“能引生那个”。“识”是指异熟识。“达到不动性”是指进入不动性。就像善心具有不动性,同样,那个异熟识也应当达到不动性。因此说“它的意思就是恰如是而有”。“某些人”是指无畏山寺的住者。“善识”:他们把异熟识也说成像善心那样。所谓“就是那个名称”,意思是就像善心一样,也可以称为“不动”。在这里,第一种解释中,“达到不动”说的是相似;第二种解释中,就是由此而有同样的名称。它的道理是:因为与不动相似,即使在异熟时也还是用这个名称,这就是所说的意思。按照所说的道理,这里因为把不动行所引生的异熟识说成“识达到不动”,所以就是以同名来显示。即使对阿拉汉果来说,这里的“也”字也包含了最高道的修习和较低道的修习,应当理解为依定力而退堕的说法,也就是先显示奢摩他的方法,说“应以广大、殊胜的心而住”,然后再说法。巴利
Hetuatthajotano yanti nipāto, karaṇe vā etaṃ paccattavacananti āha ‘‘yena kāraṇenā’’ti. Tassa saṃvattanaṃ arahati, taṃ vā payojanaṃ etassāti taṃsaṃvattanikaṃ. Viññāṇanti vipākaviññāṇaṃ. Āneñjasabhāvaṃ upagacchatīti āneñjūpagaṃ. Yathā kusalaṃ āneñjasabhāvaṃ, evaṃ taṃ vipākaviññāṇampi āneñjasabhāvaṃ upagataṃ assa bhaveyya. Tenāha – ‘‘kādisameva bhaveyyāti attho’’ti. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. Kusalaviññāṇanti vipākaviññāṇampi taṃ kusalaṃ viya vadanti. Tannāmakamevāti kusalaṃ viya āneñjanāmakameva siyā. Ettha ca purimavikappe ‘‘āneñjūpaga’’nti taṃsadisatā vuttā, dutiyavikappe tato eva taṃsamaññatā. So panāyamatthoti āneñjasadisatāya vipākakālepi taṃnāmakameva assāti yathāvutto attho. Iminā nayenāti iminā vuttanayena. Ettha hi āneñjābhisaṅkhārahetuvipākaviññāṇaṃ ‘‘āneñjūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’nti vuttattā taṃnāmakameva katvā dīpitaṃ. Arahattassāpīti apisaddena aggamaggabhāvanāyapi heṭṭhimamaggabhāvanāyapīti attho saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Samādhivasena osakkanā kathitāti ‘‘vipulena mahaggatena cetasā vihareyya’’nti samathanayaṃ dassetvā desanā kathitā.
67 这里“比丘”是指第二个“不动适合”教说所针对而说的那位比丘。先说了“更具慧者”,为了说明这一点,就说“他把两种业处合在一起而观察”。因为在较低的那一段里,从“现法之欲”等开始,只是以“色”为入口,对色、声、香、味、触作观修;而对这个比丘,则是从“凡任何色”等开始,依一切色法来修。因为世尊在讲业处时,会随顺修这个业处的比丘的根性力量,先显示相应的修习方式;后来当他的智慧变得广大时,就能毫无遗漏地把握一切法。“以遮遣色”:就是通过修离色欲而彻底超越。“于一切处”:就是在所有第三不动等境地中。巴利
67.Ayañhi bhikkhūti yaṃ uddissa ayaṃ dutiyāneñjasappāyadesanāya bhikkhu vutto. Paññavantataroti vatvā taṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘dvinnampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ ekato katvā sammasatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhimassa hi ‘‘ye ca diṭṭhadhammikā kāmā’’tiādinā rūpasaddagandharasaphoṭṭhabbāneva rūpamukhena vipassanābhiniveso kato, imassa pana ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpa’’ntiādinā sakalarūpadhammavasena. Bhagavā hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathento kammaṭṭhānikassa bhikkhuno kāraṇabalānurūpameva paṭhamaṃ bhāvanābhinivesaṃ dasseti; so pacchā ñāṇe vipulaṃ gacchante anavasesato dhammaṃ pariggaṇhāti. Rūpapaṭibāhanenāti rūpavirāgabhāvanāya sabbaso samatikkamena. Sabbatthāti sabbesu tatiyāneñjādīsu.
“更具慧者”就是智慧更胜的人。把三种业处合在一起,是指:对三种人分别依业处而说的所观法——五欲、一切色法、欲想——把它们合在一起,总摄为“这一切都是无常”后加以观照,就像经文所说:“凡是集起之法,那一切都属于灭尽之法。”因此说“这两者都是无常”等等。欲想和色想按现法利益与来世利益来区分,各有八种,这样合起来就说为“两者”,所以说“依现法利益……等略摄为两者”。依渴爱与见,是指以爱染欢喜执取“这是我的”,以邪见欢喜执取“这是我的我”,这样去欢喜执著。同样的道理,是指用这个方式,以渴爱与见的力量,欢喜、执取、吞没、确定而安住。遮遣欲,是为了显示趣向之道和赞叹而说的。因为对他来说,遮遣色是更接近的,从那里再超越空无边处;由于超越它,这一切都依观力而退落,所以说了“这两者都是无常”等话。巴利
Paññavantataroti paññuttaro. Tiṇṇampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ ekato katvāti kāmaguṇā sabbarūpadhammā kāmasaññāti evaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ kammaṭṭhānavasena tidhā vutte sammasanūpagadhamme ekato katvā, ‘‘sabbametaṃ anicca’’nti ekajjhaṃ gahetvā, sammasati yathā – ‘‘yaṃ kiñci samudayadhammaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti (dī. ni. 1.298; saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 16; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 4, 7, 8; tissametteyyamāṇavapucchāniddesa 10, 11; paṭi. ma. 2.30). Tenāha – ‘‘ubhayametaṃ anicca’’ntiādi. Kāmarūpasaññāvasena diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikabhedato aṭṭha ekekakoṭṭhāsāti evaṃ kataṃ ubhayanti vuttanti āha – ‘‘diṭṭhadhammika…pe… vasena saṅkhipitvā ubhayanti vutta’’nti. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti taṇhābhinandanāvasena ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti, diṭṭhābhinandanāvasena ‘‘eso me attā’’ti evaṃ abhinandituṃ. Eseva nayoti iminā taṇhādiṭṭhivasena ‘‘etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti abhinandituṃ ajjhosāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpetvā ṭhātunti imamatthaṃ atidisati. Kāmapaṭibāhanenāti idaṃ āgamanapaṭipadādassanatthaṃ, vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañca vuttaṃ. Rūpapaṭibāhanaṃ hissa āsannaṃ, tatopi ākāsānañcāyatanasamatikkamo, taṃsamatikkamena saheva sabbe tā vipassanāvasena osakkanā kathitā ‘‘ubhayametaṃ anicca’’ntiādivacanato.
68 这里,世尊是就自己的无所有处业处而说“自己的”。它们灭去,是因为与它相关联的欲贪灭去而灭去;而在入定的刹那,也因不再生起而灭去。因此说“证得无所有处”。以不可餍足之义,是指这种禅那等至极为殊胜,令人无法满足。那同样的行道,就是指无所有处的修习。因为这里讲的是第三无色业处,所以说了以定为依托的退缩,如“于这些……”等经文所说。巴利
68. Idha attano cāti ākiñcaññāyatanakammaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyāha. Nirujjhanti tappaṭibaddhachandarāganirodhena, samāpajjanakkhaṇe pana anuppādanenapi. Tenāha ‘‘ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ patvā’’ti. Atappakaṭṭhenāti uḷāratarabhāvena jhānasamāpattiyā atittikarabhāvena. Tameva paṭipadanti ākiñcaññāyatanabhāvanamāha. Samādhivasena osakkanā kathitā tatiyāruppakammaṭṭhānassa vuttattā ‘‘yatthetā’’tiādinā.
这里说的“于自身”,指的是称为“二支分空作意”的观修业处。下面所说的“行道”,是指紧接着前面讲过的无所有处业处。因为在止的修习中,这里的空作意更为殊胜,所以这样说。在第二无所有处,是就观的退缩而说的。巴利
Idha attanoti dvikoṭikasuññatāmanasikārasaṅkhātaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ. Heṭṭhā vuttapaṭipadanti anantaraṃ vuttaākiñcaññāyatanakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Sati samathabhāvanāyaṃ suññatāmanasikārassa idha sātisayattā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dutiyākiñcaññāyatane vipassanāvasena osakkanā kathitā’’ti.
70 在第三无所有处,“自己的我”是指称为四重空的作意,也就是观业处。“在此”是指在随观空的这个章节里。“在某处”是指在任何地方、任何时间,或者任何法中;或者,“在某处”是指在内或在外。“自己的我”就是自我。为了说明他不认为他人虚构构想出来的、属于某个人的“我”是真实的——就像“贤者梵天神啊,这位……是得自在者、父亲、已生与未生者之父”等说法那样——所以说了“对任何人”等话。其中,“他人的”是指像“其他众生”“其他士夫”那样被执取的。“并非在任何地方有我”中的“我”字,因为在这里不适用,所以说“暂且搁置我字”。“他人的”是指不同于自己的别人。为了说明他不认为那种被某一类执持邪见的人构想出来的“另有士夫为我而存在,依靠他,我的一切都会成就”的他人之我,也不认为那他人之我是自己的所有物,所以说了“并非在某处”等话。在这里,“我并非在某处”是见到自我的不存在;“在任何人中无任何我所”是见到自我对任何人都不具有属我性。而“并非……有我”和“无我所”这两句,应当按顺序分别与“有”字结合起来理解:“并非在某处有他人之我存在”,是见到他人之我的不存在;“那他人之我,对某人来说,在任何处都不具有我所性”,是见到他人之我的非属我性。这样,通过把握四重空,在内和在外对诸蕴的“我”与“我所”皆空、纯粹是诸行聚积这一点就被见到了。前面所说的行道,在这里说的仍然是无所有处的业处。以观力的方式退转已被说明,因为这是四重空之见的特殊表现,而且这种作意以它为主要。巴利
70. Tatiyākiñcaññāyatane attanoti catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārasaṅkhātaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ suññatānupassanādhikāre. Kvacīti katthaci ṭhāne, kāle, dhamme vā. Atha vā kvacīti ajjhattaṃ, bahiddhā vā. Attano attānanti sakattānaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ kho, bho brahmā…pe… vasī pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.42) paraparikappitaṃ attānañca kassaci kiñcanabhūtaṃ na passatīti dassento ‘‘kassacī’’tiādimāha. Tattha parassāti ‘‘parā pajā’’ti ‘‘paro puriso’’ti ca evaṃ gahitassa. Na ca mama kvacanīti ettha mama-saddo aṭṭhānapayuttoti āha ‘‘mamasaddaṃ tāva ṭhapetvā’’ti. Parassa cāti attato aññassa, ‘‘paro puriso nāma atthi mamatthāya sajito, tassa vasena mayhaṃ sabbaṃ ijjhatī’’ti evaṃ ekaccadiṭṭhigatikaparikappitavasena paraṃ attānaṃ, tañca attano kiñcanabhūtaṃ na passatīti dassento, ‘‘na ca kvacanī’’tiādimāha. Ettha ca nāhaṃ kvacanīti sakaattano abhāvaṃ passati. Na kassaci kiñcanatasminti sakaattano eva kassaci anattaniyataṃ passati. Na ca, mamāti etaṃ dvayaṃ yathāsaṅkhyaṃ sambandhitabbaṃ, atthīti paccekaṃ. ‘‘Na ca kvacani parassa attā atthī’’ti parassa attano abhāvaṃ passati, ‘‘tassa parassa attano mama kismiñci kiñcanatā na catthī’’ti parassa attano anattaniyataṃ passati. Evaṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā ca khandhānaṃ attattaniyasuññatā suddhasaṅkhārapuñjatā catukoṭikasuññatāpariggaṇhanena diṭṭhā hoti. Heṭṭhā vuttapaṭipadanti idhāpi ākiñcaññāyatanakammaṭṭhānameva vadati. Vipassanāvaseneva osakkanā kathitā catukoṭikasuññatādassanavisesabhāvato, tappadhānattā cassa manasikārassa.
这里,“自己的”是指非想非非想处的业处。“一切想”是指色想、有对想、种种想,以及下面三种无色想——他们说,像这样,一切想毫无剩余地灭尽。不过另一些人说,因为“下面所说的”被特别限定,所以这里提到的第四禅想等也算是想。“那”只是假名,因为正是通过遮止欲想,才成就了种种想等灭尽的意义。以定的方式退转已被说明,因为非想非非想处的修习属于止业处。巴利
Idha attanoti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanakammaṭṭhānamāha. Sabbasaññāti rūpasaññā paṭighasaññā nānattasaññā heṭṭhimā tisso arūpasaññāti evaṃ sabbasaññā anavasesā nirujjhantīti vadanti. ‘‘Heṭṭhā vuttā’’ti pana visesitattā imasmiṃ āgatā catutthajjhānasaññādayo api saññāti apare. Tanti sammutimattaṃ kāmasaññāpaṭibāhanavaseneva tesaṃ nānattasaññādinirodhassa atthasiddhattā. Samādhivasena osakkanā kathitā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanabhāvanāya samathakammaṭṭhānabhāvato.
71 过去世有五种业轮:在过去世的业有中,痴是无明,累积是行,渴望是渴爱,趋近是取,思是有——这样形成的、带着各种伴随条件的业相续。所谓没有累积,就是没有思虑、没有筹划,那它就不会成为。现在这五种果轮:由识、名色、六处、触、受组成的当下果相续,因未成就故不转起。如果那时没有累积,就是说如果没有思虑、没有筹划。所谓存在的,是指在究竟意义上真实有的东西。因此说已生。因为它是由缘所生起的,所以被称为已生。我舍离它:通过舍断与它相连的欲贪,并让它未来不再生起,我舍离它、抛弃它。巴利
71.Pubbe pañcavidhaṃ kammavaṭṭanti purimakammabhavasmiṃ moho avijjā āyūhanā saṅkhārā nikantitaṇhā upagamanaṃ upādānaṃ cetanā bhavoti evamāgato saparikkhāro kammappabandho. Na āyūhitaṃ assāti na cetitaṃ pakappitaṃ bhaveyya. Etarahi evaṃ pañcavidhaṃ vipākavaṭṭanti viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanaphassavedanāsaṅkhāto paccuppanno vipākappabandho nappavatteyya kāraṇassa anipphannattā. Sace āyūhitaṃ na bhavissatīti yadi cetitaṃ pakappitaṃ na siyā. Yaṃ atthīti yaṃ paramatthato vijjamānakaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘bhūta’’nti. Tañhi paccayanibbattatāya ‘‘bhūta’’nti vuccati. Taṃ pajahāmīti tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena tato eva āyatiṃ anuppattidhammatāpādanavasena pajahāmi pariccajāmi.
“般涅槃者”这句话,因为带着设想,指的是过去的事,所以他说“他会般涅槃”。也有人读作“Parinibbāyeyya nu kho”,意思一样。“并没有说什么”:因为在非想非非想处定中,残余的行极其微细,只有最殊胜的智才能触及那个境界,所以就它本身而言,并没有说到什么;不过,世尊是想通过理路让人了解它的差别。据说,世尊当时这样想:“坐在这集会中的阿难,凭他善于连接脉络的本事,会针对一位以非想非非想处为依托而安住的比丘,就结生和阿拉汉果提问,我将依这个提问的脉络来开示那个义理。”又因为这里所指的是“退堕”,所以成为义趣不同的教说,因此提出了提问的脉络。如果没有那个,教说就会因脉络的分别而不同,而诸佛并不惯于义趣不同的教说。“依于观”即依于彼。那位比丘的。以它而执取,故为“取”。不能般涅槃,因为不捨弃应捨之法。因此世尊说:“诸法尚应捨,何况非法。” “取之最胜”这一句,是为了显示非想非非想处有是一切有中最胜,而不是为了否定圣有中最胜的取。巴利
Parinibbāyīti saha parikappanena atītattheti āha ‘‘parinibbāyeyyā’’ti. Parinibbāyeyya nu khoti vā pāṭho, so evattho. Na kiñci kathitanti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā saṅkhārāvasesasukhumabhāvena ñāṇuttarasseva visayabhāvato sarūpato na kiñci kathitaṃ, nayena panassa visesaṃ ñāpetukāmattā. Bhagavato kira etadahosi – ‘‘imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno ānando anusandhikusalatāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ pādakaṃ katvā ṭhitassa bhikkhuno paṭisandhiṃ arahattañca sandhāya pañhaṃ pucchissati, iminā pucchānusandhinā tamatthaṃ desessāmī’’ti. Osakkanāya ca idhādhippetattā bhinnarasadesanā hotīti pucchānusandhi pucchitā. Tasmiñhi asati anusandhibhedabhinnesā desanā, na ca buddhāciṇṇā bhinnarasadesanāti. Vipassanānissitanti tannissitaṃ. Tassa bhikkhuno. Upādiyati etenāti ca upādānaṃ. Na parinibbāyati pahātabbassa appajahanato. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘dhammāpi kho, bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240). Upādānaseṭṭhanti idaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatanabhavassa sabbabhavaggatādassanaparaṃ, na pana ariyabhavaggassa upādānaseṭṭhatāpaṭisedhaparaṃ.
73 世尊说,要渡过暴流,必须依靠属于存在的法,依靠属于彼的名。啊,这真是稀有!啊,这真是未曾有!巴利
73.Nissāyāti bhavapariyāpannaṃ nāma dhammaṃ nissāya tappariyāpannaṃ nāma nissāya oghanittharaṇā bhagavatā akkhātā; aho acchariyametaṃ, aho abbhutametanti.
在九种情形里,教法都是就奢摩他行者而言而说的,而这里并没有涉及任何人的基础禅那,所以说“圣弟子”是指“干观圣弟子”。至于“把九种业处合在一起审察”这句话,是考虑到即使对禅那法,只要获得了随闻,也能审察,才这样说的。这里所说的“三地所摄之行”,是就毫无遗漏地全部把握而说的,因此说“尽其所有为有身”。巴利
Navasupi ṭhānesu samathayānikasseva vasena desanāya āgatattā, idha ca kassacipi pādakajjhānassa anāmaṭṭhattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘ariyasāvakoti sukkhavipassako ariyasāvako’’ti. Navannampi kammaṭṭhānaṃ ekato katvā sammasatīti idaṃ jhānadhammepi anussavaladdhe gahetvā sammasanaṃ sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ; tebhūmakasaṅkhāragataṃ idha vuttanti anavasesato pariggahaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘yāvatā sakkāyo’’ti.
这句“此为甘露”,是就甘露——也就是涅槃——而说的,因为阿拉汉果是以它为所缘而生起的,所以阿拉汉果具有甘露之味。因此说:“这是寂静的甘露,这是殊胜的。”又因为经中说“不执取任何事物,心便解脱”,所以在其他经典里,不执取的心解脱也被称为涅槃。巴利
Etaṃamatanti amataṃ nibbānaṃ ārabbha pavattiyā etaṃ arahattaṃ amatarasaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘etaṃ amataṃ santaṃ, etaṃ paṇīta’’nti. ‘‘Anupādāya kiñcipi aggahetvā cittaṃ vimuccī’’ti vuttattāpi anupādā cittassa vimokkho nibbānaṃ aññattha sutte vuccati.
关于“三位比丘”:这是按执取方式的不同而分为三种。对于以它为依托而安住、因此不会退失的情况,其原因应当依照前面所说的方式来了知。“综合之后”:就是妥善地安放,在每一处都毫不混杂地确定下来。由于把应当说的内容毫无遗漏地讲完了,所以就可说是善说。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃbhikkhūnanti abhinivesabhedena tividhānaṃ. Pādakaṃ katvā ṭhitassa osakkanāya abhāve kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Samodhānetvāti sammadeva odahitvā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne asaṅkarato vavatthapetvā. Sukathitaṃ nāma hoti kathetabbassa anavasesetvā kathitattā.
7. 算数师·目犍连经的注释巴利
7. Gaṇakamoggallānasuttavaṇṇanā
74 就像走下阶梯的人,会把最下面那块踏板叫作“最后一块”;而走上阶梯的人,又会把同一块踏板叫作“第一块”。所以经文说“直到最后的阶梯身架”,意思就是“直到第一层踏板”。清净场地后,就是按照场地明师所讲的方法,完成了为建造殿堂而净化场地的仪轨。于此,指在建造殿堂这件事上。能把裂成七分的细毫尖端射穿的人,就叫作射毫者。成就处所,是指成就叉立式站姿等。以握箭成拳等,是指握箭成拳、握弓弦、拉弓射箭等练习。我们这样来计算:一是一,二二得四,三三得九,四四十六,如此以“一是一、二二得四、三三得九、四四十六”等的方式,这样教算数。巴利
74. Yathā heṭṭhimasopānaphalakaṃ orohantassa pacchimaṃ nāma hoti, evaṃ ārohantassa paṭhamaṃ nāma hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘yāva pacchimasopānakaḷevarāti yāva paṭhamasopānaphalakā’’ti. Vatthuṃ sodhetvāti vatthuvijjācariyena vuttavidhinā pāsādavatthuno sodhanavidhiṃ katvā. Etthāti pāsādakaraṇe. Sattadhā bhinnassa vālaggassa aṃsukoṭivedhako vālavedhi nāma. Ṭhānasampādananti vesākhamaṇḍalādīnaṃ sampādanaṃ. Muṭṭhikaraṇādīhīti usumuṭṭhikaraṇajiyāgāhajiyāvijjhādīhi. Evaṃ gaṇāpemāti ekaṃ nāma ekameva, dve dukā cattāri, tīṇi tikāni nava, cattāri catukkāni soḷasātiādinā evaṃ gaṇanaṃ sikkhāpema.
75 他们是虚伪的:他们具备谄曲和欺诈,用这种方式来保证时机不被染污。这种调伏,即使是为了活命也不会违越,这就是他们与生俱来的过失状态。巴利
75.Kerāṭikā hontīti samayassa anupakkiliṭṭhakaraṇamāyāsāṭheyyena samannāgatā honti. Taṃ damanaṃ jīvitahetupi nātikkamati, ayamassa jātidosābhāvo.
76 为了具足念与正知:意思是,为了具足能成就恒常安住状态的念与正知。难道诸漏尽者不是已经圆满获得了念的广大与慧的广大吗?那他们的念与正知为什么还需要靠加功用行才能生起呢?于是他说“有两种”等。恒常安住者,是指常常不间断地安住在等至中、多住于等至的人,因此他们能在自己想要的任何时刻入果定。反过来,应当知道非恒常安住者的情形。所以他说“在那里”等。因为不熟练,所以无法入定。巴利
76.Satisampajaññāhi samaṅgibhāvatthāyāti satatavihāribhāvasādhanehi satisampajaññehi samannāgamatthāya. Nanu ca khīṇāsavā sativepullappattā paññāvepullappattā ca, kathaṃ tassa satisampajaññaṃ payogasādhanīyaṃ pavattanti āha ‘‘dve hī’’tiādi. Satatavihārīti satataṃ samāpattivihāribahulā, tasmā te icchiticchitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjanti. Vuttavipariyāyena nosatatavihārino daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Appetuṃ na sakkoti anāciṇṇabhāvato.
他心里盘算着:沙弥没有住处,森林里又有狮子等种种危险,他该怎么办呢?——这就是“他心里盘算着”的意思。“这样的”:就是像前面所说的那种沙弥一样的漏尽者。“这些法”:就是这部经里讲到的戒等法。“仅仅通过省察”:只靠省察自己戒行清净等,就能入定。巴利
Taṃ vitakkentoti ‘‘sāmaṇerassa senāsanaṃ natthi, araññañca sīhādīhi saparissayaṃ, kiṃ nu kho tassa bhavissatī’’ti taṃ vitakkento. Evarūpoti ediso yathāvuttasāmaṇerasadiso khīṇāsavo. Ime dhammeti imasmiṃ sutte āgate sīlādidhamme. Āvajjitvāvāti attano parisuddhasīlatādiāvajjanahetu eva samāpajjituṃ sakkhissati.
78 为了说明“那些,贤者们,乔达摩”这句话的关联,所以说了“听说在如来那里”等话。这里“如是”是指,以“那些,贤者们,乔达摩”等的方式开始讲述。巴利
78.‘‘Yeme, bho gotamā’’ti vacanassa sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘tathāgate kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evanti ‘‘yeme, bho gotamā’’tiādiākārehi vattumāraddho.
“在新奇的法中”,意思是在并非古老的教法里。那些法只是靠推理编出来的,是凭自己的聪明才智写成的。而佛法因为古老、圆满、彻底导向解脱,所以才是最上、最崇高的。因此说“在这些法中……最上”,就是这个意思。剩下的部分很容易明白。巴利
Ajjadhammesūti apurātanadhammesu. Takkanamattāni hi tehi kappetvā sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ viracitāni. Purātanatāya paripuṇṇatāya ekantaniyyānikatāya ca paramo uttamo. Tenāha – ‘‘tesu…pe… uttamoti attho’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
8. 《果巴咖·目犍连经》的注释巴利
8. Gopakamoggallānasuttavaṇṇanā
79 业本身就是“所作”,而这里存在这种业,所以把造业的地方称为“所作”。因此说“所作之处”。以那些法:指以佛陀的功德。而这些功德以一切知智为首,所以说“以一切知智等法”。以一切方式的一切:就是以一切方式,毫无剩余,这些功德有多少种类,就一种也不遗漏。以所有部分的一切:就是有多少功德的部分,就以那一切部分,毫无剩余、毫无残留地(涵盖)。那个曾有的:就是指因为憍赏弥的比丘们而在憍赏弥发生的那场争执。那场争执就在它生起的地方,刚一出现就被平息了。而当般涅槃时:就是当这位正自觉者般涅槃的时候。那时,比丘们变得更加和合。为了说明悚惧是怎样生起的,便说了“六十八”等。由于极为殊胜且反复地达到寂静,所以变得极其宁静、极其寂静。随行思察着:就是一再地正确了知、审察、决断。也有读作“anusaññāyamāno”的写法。那里是把ya改成ña来解说的,所以说“随行着”。巴利
79. Kammaṃyeva kammanto, so ettha atthīti kammakaraṇaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘kammanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kammantaṭṭhāna’’nti. Tehi dhammehīti buddhaguṇehi. Te pana sabbaññutaññāṇappamukhāti katvā āha ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇadhammehī’’ti. Sabbena sabbanti sabbappakārena anavasesaṃ, ettako guṇānaṃ pakārabhedo, tesu kiñcipi pakāraṃ anavasesetvā. Sabbakoṭṭhāsehi sabbanti yattakā guṇabhāgā, tehi sabbehi anavasesaṃ nissesameva katvā. Yopi ahosīti yopi kosambivāsīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vasena kosambiyaṃ kalaho ahosi. Sopi tattheva uppannaṭṭhāneyeva uppannamatto vūpasamito. Parinibbutakāle panassāti assa sammāsambuddhassa parinibbutakāle pana. Bhiyyosomattāya bhikkhū samaggā jātā, kathañca saṃvego jātoti dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhasaṭṭhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sātisayaṃ abhiṇhañca upasamappattiyā ativiya upasantupasantā. Anusaṃyāyamānoti anu anu sammadeva jānanto vicārento vosāsamāno. ‘‘Anusaññāyamāno’’ti vā pāṭho. Tattha ya-kārassa ña-kāraṃ katvā niddesoti āha ‘‘anuvicaramāno’’ti.
80 “正是先前那个问题”:就是果巴咖·目犍连所问的那个问题。因为他曾用“以那些法”等说法问道:“你们教法中有没有哪位比丘是核心人物?”而这位也用“有皈依处”这个说法问了同一个问题。“没有皈依处”:因为不存在你们能去提醒的那种比丘,所以没有皈依处。如来所宣说的法就是这些人的皈依处,因此他们是“以法为皈依处”。所以他说“法是依靠”。巴利
80.Heṭṭhimapucchamevāti gopakamoggallānena pucchitapucchameva. So hi ‘‘tehi dhammehī’’tiādinā, ‘‘atthi koci tumhākaṃ sāsanassa sārabhūto bhikkhū’’ti pucchi. Ayañca tameva ‘‘paṭisaraṇo’’ti pariyāyena pucchi. Appaṭisaraṇeti yaṃ tumhe bhikkhuṃ paṭibodheyyātha, tādisassa abhāvena appaṭisaraṇe. Tathāgatena pavedito dhammo paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti dhammapaṭisaraṇā. Tenāha ‘‘dhammo avassayo’’ti.
81 “到来”是指以言语表达的方式而来。在被称为违越根本规定——即重、较重、轻、较轻等种种恶行——之中,这被称为“犯戒”。所以说:“犯戒……就是违越教诫。”“依法”是指随顺法。“依教敕”是指依照教导。“法不”(dhammo no):这里的“no”是强调词,就像“无人能与如来相等”这类句子中的用法一样。因此说“唯有法来执行”。巴利
81.Āgacchatīti vācuggatabhāvena āgacchati. Vatthuvītikkamasaṅkhāte garugarutaralahulahutarādibhede ajjhācāre āpattisamaññāti āha – ‘‘āpatti…pe… āṇātikkamanamevā’’ti. Yathādhammanti dhammānurūpaṃ. Yathāsiṭṭhanti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ. Dhammo noti ettha no-saddo avadhāraṇe ‘‘na no samaṃ atthi tathāgatenā’’tiādīsu (khu. pā. 6.3; su. ni. 226) viya. Tenevāha ‘‘dhammova kāretī’’ti.
83 他带着一副虔诚恭敬的样子,说“就像你们这样的守护者、看护者所做的那样”,其实是想借这话抬高自己。接着他说“这是善的”,意思是:只要忏悔了诽谤圣者的恶业,就不会形成障碍。所谓“牛尾猴”,就是长着牛尾巴的猴子。巴利
83. ‘‘Yathā taṃ tumhādisehi rakkhakehi gopakehī’’ti evaṃ pasannavesena attānaṃ ukkaṃsāpetukāmo . Ariyūpavādapāpaṃ khamāpane sati antarāyāya na hotīti āha – ‘‘iccetaṃ kusala’’nti. Gonaṅgalamakkaṭoti gonaṅguṭṭhamakkaṭo.
84 这个人想抬高自己,就把本来应当如实达成的意义给歪曲了,把没被称赞的也说成是被称赞的,还这样讲出来。通过拒绝他这番话,是为了不让本该布施的团食因此受到障碍,想这样来保护团食,但实际上根本做不到——这就是文句的连缀方式。这里说的就是“不,婆罗门,那位世尊……”等这一段开示。“做了内在化”,就是使之融入涅槃,或者把那审查当作它的内在原因。因为那种审查确实是依于欲贪的。“这里”指的就是这段经文里。“一切摄受禅那”:为了不让世间和出世间的障碍发生,这样做了之后,由于是把色界道禅那、果禅那等一切禅那都统摄起来开示的,所以就叫作一切摄受禅那。巴利
84. Ayaṃ ukkaṃsāpetuṃ icchitaṃ yathāraddhamatthaṃ visaṃvādeti avaṇṇitampi vaṇṇitaṃ katvā kathento; imassa vacanassa paṭikkhepena iminā dātabbapiṇḍapātassa antarāyo mā hotūti evaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ rakkhituṃ na kho pana sakkāti yojanā. Idanti ‘‘na kho, brāhmaṇa, so bhagavā’’tiādidesanaṃ. Abbhantaraṃ karitvāti nibbānantogadhaṃ katvā, antaraṃ vā tassa nijjhānassa kāraṇaṃ katvā. Kāmarāgavasena hi taṃ nijjhānaṃ hotīti. Idhāti imasmiṃ suttapadese. Sabbasaṅgāhikajjhānanti lokiyalokuttarassa antarāyo mā hotūti evaṃ katvāpi rūpāvacarassa maggajhānassa phalajhānassāti sabbassapi saṅgaṇhanavasena desitattā sabbasaṅgāhakajjhānaṃ nāma kathitaṃ.
这里“Yaṃ no mayaṃ”中的“no”只是个语气助词。而“Taṃ no”里的“no”意思是“我们的”。他因为沉迷于国王的事务而受制于人,又固执地执着于一义,心生嫉妒;加上智慧愚钝,内心被对雨势的嫉妒所压倒,不能领会已经完整说出的义理,就说:“你只讲了一部分而已。”其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Yaṃ no mayanti ettha noti nipātamattaṃ. Taṃ noti ettha pana noti amhākanti attho. Usūyati rājakiccapasutatādhīnatāya ekatthābhinivesabhāvato . Mandapaññatāya vassakāragataissābhibhūtacittatāya paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vuttampi atthaṃ anupadhārento āha – ‘‘ekadesameva kathesī’’ti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第9章 《大满月经》的注释巴利
9. Mahāpuṇṇamasuttavaṇṇanā
85 “Tasmiṃahū”是说“在那一天”,所以注释里讲“在那一天”。“以绝食”:就是完全不吃食物,具备教法所制的戒行和外在的禁食行为,这样来理解整句。“或”这个字,涵盖了喝牛奶、吃蜜糖等做法。因为要靠近而安住,所以叫伍波萨他,也就是诵戒;因为要具足、成就而安住,或者要让它在心相续中安住,所以叫伍波萨他,也就是戒;又因为靠近绝食等法而安住,这叫近住,也就是伍波萨他。对于像某种特殊种姓的大象,伍波萨他只是一个名称而已,所以说“像‘伍波萨他名叫龙王’这些,只是施设”。按上面说的方式在这里近住,所以叫伍波萨他,指那一天。而这个伍波萨他,因为月份圆满,也就是月份已经满了,所以叫“完全圆满”。因为靠那一夜,月份就毫无剩余地圆满了。又因为月亮像是在衡量月份、半月等时间,所以叫“mā”(月)。在这一夜,成为圆满、完全圆满的时分,所以叫“满月”。这是说月轮圆满和月份圆满,以此显示那一天的伍波萨他性质。巴利
85.Tasmiṃahūti tasmiṃ ahanīti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ divase’’ti. Anasanenāti sabbaso āhārassa abhuñjanena sāsanikasīlena bāhirakaanasanena upetā hutvāti yojanā. Vā-saddena khīrapānamadhusāyanādividhiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Upecca vasitabbato uposatho, pātimokkhuddeso. Upetena samannāgatena hutvā vasitabbato santāne vāsetabbato uposatho, sīlaṃ. Anasanādidhammādiṃ vā upecca vasanaṃ upavāso uposatho. Tathārūpe hatthijātivisese uposathoti samaññāmattanti āha – ‘‘uposatho nāma nāgarājātiādīsu paññattī’’ti. Vuttanayena upavasanti etthāti uposatho, divaso. So panesa uposatho. Māsapuṇṇatāyāti māsassa pūritabhāvena. Sampuṇṇāti sabbaso puṇṇā. Tāya hi rattiyā vasena māso anavasesato puṇṇo hoti. Māsaddhamāsādibhedaṃ kālaṃ māti minanto viya hotīti ca ‘‘mā’’iti cando vuccati. Etthāti etissā rattiyā. Puṇṇo paripuṇṇakalo jātoti puṇṇamā. Tañhi candapāripūriyā māsapāripūriyā evamāha. Etena tassa uposathabhāvaṃ dasseti.
果实被看见、显现出来,所以叫“指示”;接着又说是“原因”,因此说“指示就是原因”。说一切,就是把自己所掌握的一切都讲出来。不能说,是因为超出了他们的范围。殿堂庭院,就是殿堂前面的开放场地。依照下面所说的方式,就是应当按照《有学经》(中部注疏2.22)里所说的方式详细展开。巴利
Dissati phalaṃ sandissatīti deso, hetūti āha ‘‘desanti kāraṇa’’nti. Sabbaṃ kathenti sabbaṃ attanā pariggahitappakāraṃ kathenti. Kathetuṃ na sakkonti avisayattā. Pāsādapariveṇeti pāsādassa purato vivaṭaṅgaṇe. Heṭṭhā vuttanayenāti sekhasutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22) vuttanayena vitthāretabbaṃ.
86 这里“Ime nu kho”中的“nu”是用来表达疑惑的,所以说“像是带着疑惑在提问”。“由已知者……”等话,应当理解为是在展示提问的方式,而不是要表明提问的导师自己不知道。世尊确实是知道的。他是像不知道的人那样来提问。他是站在如实了知事物本来面目的立场上,像那样提问,其实是安住在伪装中。因此说“长老说这样的话又能怎样呢?”意思是,那种原因早已被彻底断除了。巴利
86.Ime nu khoti ettha nūti saṃsayajotanoti āha – ‘‘vimatipucchā viya kathitā’’ti. Jānantenātiādi pucchāvattadassanaparaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na pucchakassa satthu attano ajānanabhāvadīpanaparaṃ. Jānāti hi bhagavā. Ajānantena viya hutvā pucchite. Yathābhūtasabhāvaṃ jānanto viya pucchati kohaññe ṭhatvā. Tenāha – ‘‘thero evarūpaṃ vacanaṃ kiṃ karissatī’’ti kāraṇassa suppahīnattāti adhippāyo.
以欲为根,就是以渴爱之欲为根。因为渴爱正是苦的集起。或者说,善巧的想,就是坚固、清净、微妙的想;善巧的行,就是锐利、坚固、清净的行;或者说,是极为清净、广大、殊胜的识。这些含义,用“在想等当中也是同样的道理”这句话来指示。那么,为什么这里只以未来时的形式来开示呢?因此说“然而因为……”等等。巴利
Chandamūlakāti taṇhāchandamūlakā. Taṇhā hi dukkhasamudayo. Kusalasañño vā thiravisadanipuṇasañño vā, kusalasaṅkhāro vā tikhiṇathiravisadasaṅkhāro vā; suvisuddhavipulodāraviññāṇo vāti imamatthaṃ ‘‘saññādīsupi eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati. Kasmā panettha anāgatakālavaseneva desanā āgatāti āha ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi.
对于诸蕴的“蕴的施设”来说,“蕴”这个名称,是用来指称那些以“蕴”一词所表示的意义——也就是具有坏灭、感受、认知、造作、了别这些性质的事物。问“以多少”,是问以多大的范围、以什么样的意义,在“积聚”“部分”等意义当中,究竟是指哪一种?这就是这里的用意。巴利
Khandhānaṃ khandhapaṇṇattīti khandhasaddābhidheyyānaṃ ruppanānubhavanasañjānanābhisaṅkharavijānanasabhāvānaṃ atthānaṃ ‘‘khandho’’ti ayaṃ samaññā. Kittakenāti kiṃparimāṇena atthena, rāsatthabhāgatthādīsu kīdisenāti adhippāyo.
“因之因”说的是:作为因缘的因。贪等法对俱生诸法以根本义来资助,这种作用就是无差别的因义;为了说明这种因义在地界等法上也仅以缘的方式存在,就以第二个“因”字加以区分,说为“因之因”。无明对福行、非福行、不动行等是共同的缘,所以叫共通因。在“过去、未来、现在的诸业所等起,依处所、依因而有果报”这句话里,虽然还有其他缘存在,但业对可爱或不可爱的果报起决定作用,所以业是其主要原因,因此说“善与不善在各自给出果报时是最上因”。“大种是因”这个意思,也能用“大种是缘”来表达,因为“因”和“缘”词义相通,缘本身就是因,也就是缘因;而色蕴的因,正是对色蕴作施设表达的缘,所以说“这里指的是缘因”。从某个角度说,如果某个缘法对依它生起的法在生起和安住上是缘,那么由于它的存在,从名称上,对那个法的施设表达来说,它也可以被称为缘。经文中没有分别说明的意义,为了详细显示出来,才说“其中地界”等。这里的“为了施设”,是指通过有因、无因等方式来使人了解。而这一切使人了解,都是以智慧来照见的,所以说“为了见”。巴利
Hetuhetūti hetupaccayabhūto hetu. Yo hi lobhādīnaṃ sahajātadhammesu mūlaṭṭhenupakārakabhāvo nippariyāyena hetuttho; so pathavīādīsupi paccayabhāvamattena hetupariyāyadassanato dutiyena hetu-saddena visesetvā vutto ‘‘hetuhetū’’ti. Avijjā puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ sādhāraṇapaccayattā sādhāraṇahetu, ‘‘atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammasamādānānaṃ ṭhānaso hetuso vipāka’’nti ettha vijjamānesupi aññesu paccayesu iṭṭhāniṭṭhavipākaniyāmakattā kammaṃ tassa padhānakāraṇanti āha – ‘‘kusalākusalaṃ attano attano vipākadāne uttamahetū’’ti. ‘‘Mahābhūtā hetū’’ti ayamevattho ‘‘mahābhūtā paccayo’’ti imināpi vuttoti hetusaddapaccayasaddānaṃ samānatthattā paccayo eva hetu paccayahetu, yo ca rūpakkhandhassa hetu, so eva tassa paññāpanāya paccayoti vuttoti āha – ‘‘idha paccayahetu adhippeto’’ti. Yadaggena paccayadhammo attano paccayuppannassa uppādāya ṭhitiyā ca paccayo, tadaggena tassa bhāvato samaññāto paññāpanāyapi so paccayoti vattabbataṃ arahatīti. Pāḷiyaṃ avibhāgena vuttamatthaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ, ‘‘tattha pathavīdhātū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paññāpanāyāti sahetuahetukantiādiākārehi bodhanāya . Taṃ pana sabbodhanaṃ ñāṇena dassanaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dassanatthāyā’’ti.
“触”是指具有触的状态。这里说的是能完成自身作用的触的生起。因为已经生起的触,会成为那种受的缘。世尊在这里正是为了这个目的,依于人而作开示,所以应当知道,“触”这个词是就现在和过去两种时态来说的。当触存在时,便有感受,这说的就是触缘受。其余两句也是同样的道理。正如对受那样,对想和行来说,触也是特别的缘,因为没有触,它们就不存在。通过执取思——由于思与造作活动相应,并且以思为主导——行蕴的诸法都被含摄在内。同样,在经分别和行蕴分别中,也单单以“眼触所生思”等来指称思。关于识蕴,这里为了显示在某一存在中作为最初的识是名色的缘,才说“先说结生识”等。其中,对于胎生者自然色的色转起,说“以上方为界限”,因为在结生刹那,三十种色以上的色当时还未生起。接下来,为了显示转起识是名色的缘,依于门而说“在眼门”等。那么,难道识也有触作为缘吗?为什么只说三个蕴是以触为缘呢?确实如此,但与识俱在的触,是受等的缘,对识却不是这样。因此世尊说:“三者的会合是触。”正如触是受等的特别缘,名色也是识的特别缘;也正如由名色为缘而有识。所以为了显示这个差别,才说名色是识的缘,而不是触。巴利
Phassoti phassasamaṅgībhāvo. So cettha sakiccanipphādanasamatthassa phassassa nibbatti. Nibbatto hi phasso tathārūpāya vedanāya paccayo hotīti. Etadatthamevettha bhagavatā puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā, tasmā paccuppannātītakālavasena dvikāliko phassasaddo veditabbo. Phasse sati vedeti phassapaccayā vedanāicceva vuttaṃ hoti. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Yatheva hi vedanāya evaṃ saññāya saṅkhārānampi phasso visesapaccayo tasmiṃ asati abhāvato. Cetanāggahaṇena āyūhanānurūpatāya tappadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammā gahitā. Tathā hi suttantabhājanīye saṅkhārakkhandhabhājanīye (vibha. 21, 22) ca ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā cetanāva niddiṭṭhā. Viññāṇakkhandhassāti ettha ekasmiṃ bhave ādibhūtaviññāṇassa nāmarūpapaccayataṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘paṭisandhiviññāṇena tāvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha gabbhaseyyakassa sabhāvakassa rūpapavattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘uparimaparicchedenā’’ti vuttaṃ samatiṃsato upari paṭisandhikkhaṇe tassa rūpānaṃ asambhavato. Idāni pavattiviññāṇassa nāmarūpapaccayaṃ dvāravasena dassetuṃ, ‘‘cakkhudvāre’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nanu ca viññāṇassapi phasso paccayo, kasmā tayo eva khandhā phassapaccayā vuttāti? Saccametaṃ, yathā pana viññāṇasahito phasso vedanādīnaṃ paccayo, na evaṃ viññāṇassa. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204; ma. ni. 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.44, 45; 2.4.60) phasso viya nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇassa visesapaccayo yathā nāmarūpapaccayāpi viññāṇanti. Tasmā imaṃ visesaṃ dassetuṃ nāmarūpasseva viññāṇapaccayatā vuttā, na phassassa.
87 只要身见还会生起,轮回就没有尽头;没有断除身见的人,就在轮回中流转。所以论师说:“尊者,那么是怎样的呢?”——这是问轮回。正如阐明身见就是问轮回,同样,阐明破除身见就是问还灭。因此说:“身见不存在”——这是问还灭。巴利
87. Yāva sakkāyadiṭṭhi samuppajjati, tāva vaṭṭassa pariyanto natthevāti appahīnasakkāyadiṭṭhiko vaṭṭe paribbhamatīti āha – ‘‘kathaṃ pana, bhanteti vaṭṭaṃ pucchanto’’ti. Yathā ca sakkāyadiṭṭhijotanā vaṭṭapucchā, evaṃ tabbhedanajotanā vivaṭṭapucchāti āha – ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhi na hotīti vivaṭṭaṃ pucchanto’’ti.
88 “对于色,这是它的味”:如实照见,就是遍知现观;而色属于苦谛,所以说“由此说明了遍知通达和苦谛”。由于经文说“凡是色都是无常”等等,无常等性质就是色中的过患;该过患因其依缘而生起,所以缘就是集谛;通过断除集来超越过患,也就是凭借把握过患而成立这个道理,所以说“由此说明了断通达和集谛”。一切有为法的出离,也就是涅槃,应当以作证现观来了悟,所以说“由此说明了作证通达和灭谛”。在这三处,就是指上面所说的苦等三种现观之处。那些正见等法,就是被称为圣道的正见等八法,或者七法。修习通达就是道谛,是依修习现观而生起的。其余“对于受,这是它的味”等句子,也是同样的道理。巴利
88.Ayaṃrūpe assādoti yāthāvato dassanaṃ pariññābhisamayo, dukkhasaccapariyāpannañca rūpanti āha – ‘‘iminā pariññāpaṭivedho ceva dukkhasaccañca kathita’’nti. ‘‘Yaṃ rūpaṃ anicca’’ntiādivacanato aniccādibhāvo tattha ādīnavo, so cassa paccayādhīnavuttitāya paccayo samudayasaccanti samudayappahānena ādīnavasamatikkamoti ādīnavaggahaṇena siddhamatthamāha – ‘‘pahānapaṭivedho ceva samudayasaccañcā’’ti. Sabbasaṅkhatanissaraṇaṃ nibbānañca sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena paṭivijjhitabbanti āha – ‘‘iminā sacchikiriyāpaṭivedho ceva nirodhasaccañcā’’ti. Imesu tīsu ṭhānesūti yathāvuttesu dukkhādīsu tīsu abhisamayaṭṭhānesu. Ye sammādiṭṭhiādayo dhammāti ye ariyamaggasaññitā sammādiṭṭhiādayo aṭṭha, satta vā dhammā. Bhāvanāpaṭivedho maggasaccanti bhāvanābhisamayavasena pavattaṃ maggasaccaṃ. Sesapadesupīti, ‘‘ayaṃ vedanāya assādo’’tiādipadesupi.
89 “于此”这里,因为近在眼前,所以指的是自身;这自身就是内蕴。与它相对的,“外”说的是他人的有识之身。“于一切相”则包括一切色相等相。不过,这些相有的系属于根,有的不系属于根,因为它们的自性就是如此,所以说“也包含不系属于根的”。这里由于提到了识,受等也被一并包含在内,因为它们不相分离,所以说“于有识之身”。另外,“身”也可以理解为诸蕴的集合。巴利
89.Imasminti āsannapaccakkhatāya sakaattabhāvo gahito, tadeva ajjhattā khandhāti tappaṭiyogitāya, ‘‘bahiddhāti parassa saviññāṇake kāye’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbanimittesūti sabbesu rūpanimittādīsupi . Tāni pana indriyabaddhānipi anindriyabaddhānipi taṃsabhāvānīti āha ‘‘anindriyabaddhampi saṅgaṇhātī’’ti. Viññāṇaggahaṇenevettha vedanādayopi gahitā avinābhāvatoti, ‘‘saviññāṇake kāye’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kāyo’’ti vā khandhasamūhoti attho.
90 “立于无我”是指:立足于自我已被去除、以无我为本性的五蕴这一范畴,以此为所依而造作的各种业。“立于何种我”是问:要依于什么样的我,这些业才会显示出依止的果报并成熟?由此说明:因为完全没有作者和受者,所以执著“这是我的业”说不通;而且诸蕴是刹那灭的,还会犯上“已作的失坏、未作的却得到”的过失。巴利
90.Anattani ṭhatvāti attarahite anattasabhāve khandhakoṭṭhāse ṭhatvā taṃ ādhāraṃ katvā katāni kammāni. Katarasmiṃ attani ṭhatvāti kīdise attani nissayavipākaṃ dassanti vipaccissanti. Etena kārakavedakarahitattā attapakkhakammakāni na yujjantīti dasseti, khandhānaṃ khaṇikattā ca katanāsaakatabbhāgamadoso ca āpajjatīti.
这里讲的是用追问和辨析来澄清问题的方法。先就杀生来说明它与业道的关系。在每一个刹那都在坏灭、本性就是如此坏灭的诸行当中,到底是谁在杀?又是谁被杀?如果说杀和被杀的只是心与心所的相续,那么它们是无色的,根本不可能用砍、割、劈、裂等方式去伤害,也不可能被伤害。如果说杀和被杀的是色法的相续,那么色法没有心识,就像枯木、木柴一样,对它砍啊割啊,并不会像对活着的身体那样构成杀生的罪业,就像对死尸一样。再说,杀生的加行,比如用武器去打、去砍等等,到底是对过去的诸行、未来的诸行,还是现在的诸行而发的呢?先说过去和未来的诸行,那根本不可能,因为它们不存在。再说现在的诸行,由于诸行是刹那刹那坏灭的,它们的本性就是坏灭,正朝着消亡奔去,那么加行就成了白费力气;而且坏灭本身并不需要什么原因,所以死亡并不是由打、砍等加行造成的。诸行本身也没有任何主动的作用,那这个加行又算谁的呢?又因为诸行是刹那性的,杀心一起就同时坏灭了,等到行为完成的时候,心已经不在那里了,那到底是谁被系缚在杀生业里呢?巴利
Tatrāyaṃ (itivu. aṭṭha. 74; sārattha. ṭī. 1.5) codanāsodhanāvidhi – pāṇātipātavasena tāva kammapathasambandhavibhāvanā, khaṇe khaṇe hi nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hanti, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpattā na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, napi vikopanīyo. Atha rūpasantāno, so acetanattā kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipātāpuññaṃ pasavati yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa paharaṇappahārādiko atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya, anāgatesu, paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo? Khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanakassa kiriyāpariyosānakālānavaṭṭhānato kassa pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti?
可以这样回答:所谓“杀”,就是与前面所说的杀心相应的一堆行蕴,被称为“有情”的那个东西在杀。所谓“被杀”,就是以对方发起的杀生加行为直接原因,作为“死者”世俗言说转起之系属,失去了体温、识和命根,也就是依那个加行应当生起的名色法聚,或者纯粹是心和心所的相续,这叫被杀。虽然心和心所的相续本身不是杀生加行直接触及的对象,但在五蕴有中,心和心所的生起要依靠色法的相续,因其转起依赖于色相续。别人对色相续施加断命根的加行时,就会生起阻碍上述业生色法之流的相异色法,于是有中断。所以杀生并非不可能。杀生也不是无因的,对现在的诸行来说,加行并非没有作用:因为在现行诸行上施加加行之后,紧接着应当生起的那些行蕴聚就无法再那样生起。诸行各自刹那灭,这在这里并不算“死”,而以相续的中断为死,如前所说,这种相续的死是有因的,所以死并非无因。杀生加行也不是没有作者:即使在无主动作用的诸行当中,仅凭它们聚合就成为资助缘,这些因缘各自决定生起与自己相应的果报,由此安立作者,就像说“灯能照亮,月天子是月亮”一样。也不是说纯粹与语、意俱起的心心所聚本身就是杀生,因为它是依相续而安立的;而依相续转起的灯等,其作用成就也是看得见的。因此,确实有被杀生之业系缚的人;正因如此,在哪个相续中生起了杀生思,就在那个相续中,由其他缘的和合,于他世地狱等处生起它的果报。所以,已作的业绝不会消失,未作的业也不会凭空承受。依这个道理,对于不与取等,也应随其所宜,了知业道关联的阐明。巴利
Vuccateyathāvuttavadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārapuñjo sattasaṅkhāto hanti. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatausmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārapavattinibandhano yathāvuttavappayogakaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno. Vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattitavibandhakavisadirūpuppattiyā vigate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo; nāpi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katappayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito. Khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ ; na ca katturahito pāṇātipātappayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano attano anurūpaphaluppādane niyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā – ‘‘padīpo pakāseti, nisākaro candimā’’ti. Na ca kevalassa vacādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato; santānavasena pavattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyasiddhi dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammunā baddho; tato eva yasmiṃ santāne pāṇātipātacetanā pavattā; tattheva santāne paccayantarasamavāyena bhavantare nirayādīsu tassā phalappavattīti nattheva katavināso akatabbhāgamo ca. Iminā nayena adinnādānādīnañca vasena yathārahaṃ kammapathasambandhavibhāvanā veditabbāti.
一切执取见解都只发生在被爱欲控制的人身上,所以经文说“以爱欲为主导”。所谓“在那些那些法中”,是指在由我所开示、所显示的诸法之中。所谓“自然业处”,是指从那位长老面前领受之后,一直持续修习的业处。所谓“另一个新业处”,是指依照世尊的教导而另外新领受的业处。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Sabbo diṭṭhiggāho taṇhāvasagatasseva hotīti āha ‘‘taṇhādhipateyyenā’’ti. Tesu tesu dhammesūti mayā desiyamānadassanadhammesu. Pakatikammaṭṭhānanti tassa therassa santike gahetvā parihariyamānakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Aññaṃ navakammaṭṭhānanti bhagavato desanānusārena gahitaṃ aññaṃ navaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
10.《小满月经》的注释巴利
10. Cūḷapuṇṇamasuttavaṇṇanā
91 “沉默、沉默”是重复的说法,是为了表达“遍及一切”的意思才这样说的,所以接着说“无论看向哪里”等等。在“观察后”这个词里,前缀anu也是“遍及一切”的意思,所以就是反复观察,意思是“一再地看”。因此说“从那里那里看过后”。不善、卑劣的男子就是非善人,所以说“恶男子、低劣男子”。那个“他”就是非善人。他不能辨认出非善人,是因为不能如实了知非善人的法。“具足恶法”,就是具足身恶行等,以及不知足等低劣的法。“对非善人有信从”,就是说这个人对非善人有信随,所以说“亲近非善人”。“非善人之思”是省略了后一个词的说法,指惯于思维非善人的法,所以说“以非善人之思而思惟”,意思是思维恶的思惟。“非善人之谋量”,指非善人的思虑筹量、非善人的考察。“非善人之语”,指四种恶语。“非善人之业”,指三种身恶行。“非善人之见”,特别指十种事上的邪见,具足这个就是具足非善人之见。“非善人之施”,指不恭敬布施等。而这整个含义,从巴利原文本身就能理解。巴利
91.Tuṇhībhūtaṃtuṇhībhūtanti āmeḍitavacanaṃ byāpanicchāvasena vuttanti āha – ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ disa’’ntiādi. Anuviloketvāti ettha anusaddopi byāpanicchāyamevāti anu anu viloketvāti attho. Tenevāha – ‘‘tato tato viloketvā’’ti. Asanto nīco purisoti asappurisoti āha – ‘‘pāpapuriso lāmakapuriso’’ti. Soti asappuriso. Tanti asappurisaṃ jānituṃ na sakkoti asappurisadhammānaṃ yāthāvato ajānanato. Pāpadhammasamannāgatoti kāyaduccaritādiasantuṭṭhitādilāmakadhammasamannāgato. Asappurise bhatti etassāti asappurisabhatti. Tenāha – ‘‘asappurisasevano’’ti. Asappurisadhammo asappuriso uttarapadalopena, tesaṃ cintanasīloti asappurisacintī. Tenāha ‘‘asappurisacintāya cintako’’ti, duccintitacintīti attho. Asappurisamantananti asādhujanavicāraṃ asappurisavīmaṃsaṃ. Asappurisavācanti catubbidhaṃ dubbhāsitaṃ. Asappurisakammaṃ nāma tividhampi kāyaduccaritaṃ. Asappurisadiṭṭhi nāma visesato dasavatthukā micchādiṭṭhi, tāya samannāgato asappurisadiṭṭhiyā samannāgato, asappurisadānaṃ nāma asakkaccadānādi. Sabbopāyamattho pāḷito eva viññāyati.
“我要杀生”这类意图,确实也可以是为了伤害别人而生起,但那种意图其实是让自己承受更强烈、更沉重的痛苦,而不是像别人受苦那样。为了说明这个道理,才说“是为自己的苦而思量”。就像说“某某人、某某人”那样,作恶的人虽然在感受恶报的一部分,而且是强烈、沉重的那部分,但他所显示出来的情况是:别人在那样受苦,他自己却不像别人那样在受苦。因此说“是为了伤害别人”。“执取”是指以恶行的同伴身份而执取。巴利
‘‘Pāṇaṃ hanissāmī’’tiādikā cetanā kāmaṃ parabyābādhāyapi hotiyeva, yathā pana sā attano balavataradukkhatthāya hoti, tathā na parassāti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘attano dukkhatthāya cinteti’’icceva vutto. Yathā asuko asukantiādīhi pāpako pāpavipākekadesaṃ balavaṃ garutaraṃ vā paccanubhontopi yathā paro paccanubhoti, na tathā sayanti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘parabyābādhāyā’’ti. Gahetvāti pāpakiriyāya sahāyabhāvena gahetvā.
不恭敬,就是带着轻慢的态度。对应该布施的东西不恭敬,表现出来就是没有信心、不欢喜的样子;对人不恭敬,表现出来就是不尊重、不看重。为了说明这个意思,才说“就是对应施之物不恭敬”等等。不以心相待,就是没有放在心上,也就是没有供养的意思。因为供养的人会把应当供养的对象放在心里,不会把它丢在外面不管。或者用珍重的心来对待,就是恭敬、尊重,也就是重视的行为;反过来,就是不恭敬、不尊重。丢弃,就像对待剩饭等该扔掉的东西一样,随手抛弃。所以说“就像想要扔掉一样”等等。就像把病投进去一样,意思是像用饭等涂抹病人的身体之后,把病投进蚁穴里一样。如果一个人有这样的见解:“这个布施的果报一定会回到我身上”,那他就是“期望果报回来的人”;但这里说的不是那样的人,所以说他是“不期望果报回来的人”。因此说“不期待果报而布施”。巴利
Asakkaccanti anādaraṃ katvā. Deyyadhammassa asakkaraṇaṃ appasannākāro, puggalassa asakkaraṇaṃ agarukaraṇanti imamatthaṃ dassento, ‘‘deyyadhammaṃ na sakkaroti nāmā’’tiādimāha. Acittīkatvāti na citte katvā, na pūjetvāti attho. Pūjento hi pūjetabbavatthuṃ citte ṭhapeti, tato na bahi karoti. Cittaṃ vā acchariyaṃ katvā paṭipatti cittīkaraṇaṃ, sambhāvanakiriyā. Tappaṭikkhepato acittīkaraṇaṃ, asambhāvanakiriyā. Apaviddhanti ucchiṭṭhādichaḍḍanīyadhammaṃ viya avakhittakaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘chaḍḍetukāmo viyā’’tiādi. Rogaṃ pakkhipantoviyāti rogikasarīraṃ odanādīhi pamajjitvā vammike rogaṃ pakkhipanto viya. Addhā imassa dānassa phalaṃ mameva āgacchatīti evaṃ yassa tathā diṭṭhi atthi, so āgamanadiṭṭhiko, ayaṃ pana na tādisoti āha ‘‘anāgamanadiṭṭhiko’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘no phalapāṭikaṅkhī hutvā detī’’ti.
虽然前面说的那种人确实具备非正法等恶法,但为了说明在这一切恶法之中邪见罪咎最重,所以经文说“以那邪见,他投生到地狱”。所谓“按相反方式说”,就是黑分所说的内容,反过来就是白分应当理解的意思。在“有天的世间”等说法里,“天”这个词指六欲界天,这里也一样,所以注释说“六欲界天”。那么,既然梵天神已经单独列出来了,这里是不是就不包括欲界天了呢?不是。因为这里指的是布施的果报,所以包括欲界天;而且在这里也应当理解为六欲界天,因为经文提到了“天的大性”等说法。“三种姓的成就”,指刹帝利大性等三种姓的成就。应当知道,这里不只是指族姓的成就,还包括寿命、容貌、名声、财富、自在等成就,因为靠广大布施所积的福业力量,这些也都能实现。这只是就纯粹的轮回流转来说的,在白分里完全没有涉及出离。这里的信等,指的是世间善法的资粮。其余部分很容易理解。巴利
Kāmañcāyaṃ yathāvuttapuggalo asaddhammādīhi pāpadhammehi samannāgato, tehi pana sabbehipi micchādassanaṃ mahāsāvajjanti dassetuṃ, ‘‘tāya micchādiṭṭhiyā niraye upapajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttapaṭipakkhanayenāti kaṇhapakkhe vuttassa atthassa vipariyāyena sukkapakkhe attho veditabbo. ‘‘Sadevakaṃ loka’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 1) devasaddo chakāmāvacaradevesu, evamidhāti āha ‘‘chakāmāvacaradevā’’ti. Tattha brahmānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇanti ce? Idha dānaphalassa adhippetattā kāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ , tatthāpi chakāmāvacaraggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ devamahattatādivacanato. Tiṇṇaṃ kulānaṃ sampattīti khattiyamahattādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ kulānaṃ sampatti, na kevalaṃ kulasampadā eva adhippetā, atha kho tattha āyuvaṇṇayasabhogaissariyādisampadāpi adhippetāti daṭṭhabbaṃ uḷārassa dānamayapuññassa vasena tesampi samijjhanato. Suddhavaṭṭavaseneva kathitaṃ sukkapakkhepi sabbaso vivaṭṭassa anāmaṭṭhattā. Saddhādayo hi lokiyakusalasambhārā evettha adhippetāti. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.